Yamaha RX-V559 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V559

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

Yamaha RX-V559

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V559

Printed in Malaysia WG73420

RX-V559

AV R e c e i ve r

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V559_U_cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, November 22, 2005 2:20 PM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by

the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may

cause the product and cart combination to

overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack

unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s

instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-

mance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,

be sure the service technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the same

characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to

this product, ask the service technician to perform safety

checks to determine that the product is in proper operating

condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – This unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna

or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,

provides information with regard to proper grounding of the

mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire

to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s

attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides

guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies

that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding

system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as

practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning this unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

iii

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at

least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20

cm on the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances,

motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping

or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and

liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or

damage to this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and

may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage

resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than

specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed.

The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Install this unit near the AC wall outlet where the power

cable plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on

common operating errors before concluding that this unit is

faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release

it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, and then

disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet.

19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:

Asia model ............................ 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

General model ........ 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YA M A H A and the Electronic Industries

Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power

source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even

if this unit itself is turned off. In this state, this unit is

designed to consume a very small quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear panel of this

unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for

future reference.

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

FEATURES............................................................. 2

GETTING STARTED............................................ 3

Supplied accessories .................................................. 3

Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4

Front panel ................................................................. 4

Remote control........................................................... 6

Front panel display .................................................... 9

Rear panel ................................................................ 11

CONNECTIONS .................................................. 12

Placing speakers....................................................... 12

Connecting speakers ................................................ 13

Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 16

Audio and video signal flow.................................... 17

Connecting a TV...................................................... 18

Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder,

a VCR or an STB................................................. 19

Connecting a CD player, an MD player

or a tape deck....................................................... 21

Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........ 22

Connecting a multi-format player

or an external decoder ......................................... 23

Connecting a game console, a video camera

or a portable audio player .................................... 23

Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 24

Connecting the power cable..................................... 25

Setting the speaker impedance................................. 26

Turning on and off the power .................................. 27

BASIC SETUP ...................................................... 28

PLAYBACK.......................................................... 31

USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 33

Using SILENT CINEMA ........................................ 33

Muting the audio output........................................... 33

Selecting the night listening mode........................... 33

Selecting the input mode ......................................... 34

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 34

Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 35

Selecting the Compressed Music

Enhancer mode .................................................... 36

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 37

Enjoying multi-channel sources

in 2-channel stereo............................................... 38

Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 38

Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound.............................. 38

USING VIDEO FEATURES ............................... 39

Displaying the input source information ................. 39

Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 40

Playing video sources in the background ................ 40

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND .................... 41

Enjoying multi-channel sources in surround ........... 41

Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround.................. 42

Using Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 43

RECORDING ........................................................44

FM/AM TUNING..................................................45

Automatic tuning ..................................................... 45

Manual tuning.......................................................... 46

Automatic preset tuning........................................... 47

Manual preset tuning ............................................... 48

Selecting preset stations........................................... 49

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 50

SATELLITE RADIO TUNING.................52

Connecting the XM Connect-and-Play

digital antenna accessory..................................... 52

XM Satellite Radio controls and functions.............. 53

Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 54

Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 55

Selecting the XM Satellite Radio search mode ....... 56

Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 60

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information .......................................................... 61

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS .............................63

Selecting sound field programs ............................... 63

Sound field program descriptions............................ 64

Changing sound field parameter settings................. 66

Sound field program speaker layouts ...................... 72

SET MENU ............................................................75

Using SET MENU................................................... 77

1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 78

2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 83

3 OPTION MENU................................................... 85

ADVANCED SETUP ............................................88

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................90

Controlling this unit, a TV,

or other components ............................................ 90

Setting the remote control code ............................... 92

Setting library codes ................................................ 93

Resetting all remote control codes........................... 94

USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION .....95

Connecting Zone 2................................................... 95

Controlling Zone 2................................................... 96

USING iPod

.........................................................98

Setting the remote control code ............................... 98

Controlling iPod ...................................................... 98

RESETTING THE SYSTEM.............................100

TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................101

GLOSSARY.........................................................106

Audio information ................................................. 106

Video information.................................................. 107

Sound field program information .......................... 108

SPECIFICATIONS.............................................109

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

FEATURES

Built-in 6-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

(0.06% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω)

Front: 95 W + 95 W

Center: 95 W

Surround: 95 W + 95 W

Surround back: 95 W

Sound field programs

◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound

fields

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/

24 decoder

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/

Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder

◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

™

Sophisticated AM/FM tuner

◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)

◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the “XM

Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory” sold separately)

◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the surround sound

content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-

channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience

iPod controlling capability

◆ DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock

(such as YDS-10 sold separately), which supports iPod (Click

and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini

Other features

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize

this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system

◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input

◆ S-video signal input/output capability

◆ Component video input/output capability

(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)

◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔

S-video → component video) capability for monitor out

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Sleep timer

◆ Cinema and music night listening modes

◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes,

backlighting input selector buttons, and an iPod (stationed in a

YAMAHA iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK

terminal) controlling capability

◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility

◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and Zone 2

using ZONE CONTROL

◆ PORTABLE mini analog input jack on the front panel for a

portable audio player

◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound

quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to

that of a high-quality stereo

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button

names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In

case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the

U.S. and other countries.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM

Satellite Radio Inc.

Neural Surround

™

name and related logos are trademarks owned

by Neural Audio Corporation.

FEATURES

Notes

iPod

GETTING STARTED

INTRODUCTION

Check that you received all of the following parts.

1 Take off the battery compartment cover.

2 Insert the two supplied batteries

(AA, R6, UM-3) according to the polarity

markings (+ and –) on the inside of the

battery compartment.

3 Snap the battery compartment cover back

into place.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following

conditions:

– the operation range of the remote control decreases.

– the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes

dim.

• Do not use an old battery together with a new one.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2

minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,

the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory

is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code

and program any acquired functions that may have been

cleared.

GETTING STARTED

Supplied accessories

Installing batteries in the remote control

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

DISC SKIP

STEREO

EFFECT

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X DVR

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

Remote control

Batteries (2)

(AA, R6, UM-3)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.S.A., Canada, China, Asia

and General models)

AM loop antenna

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna

adapter (U.K. model only)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.K., Europe, Australia

and Korea models)

Notes

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

The XM Satellite Radio controlling functions in the following buttons (SEARCH MODE, CATEGORY, PRESET/TUNING/CH l /

h, MEMORY, and DISPLAY) are only applicable to the U.S.A. model and are operational only when “XM” is selected as the input

source. For details, see “XM Satellite Radio controls and functions” on page 53.

1 MASTER ON/OFF

Turns on or off this unit (see page 27).

2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF

Turns on the main zone or sets it to the standby mode

(see page 27).

• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote

control.

• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay

before this unit can reproduce sound.

• This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is

pressed inward to the ON position.

3 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control (see page 8).

4 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this unit

(see page 9).

5 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT

• Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when

“TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 45).

• Selects the speaker channel whose output level you

want to adjust when “TUNER” is not selected as the

input source (see page 35).

6 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h, LEVEL +/–

• Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8)

when “TUNER” is selected as the input source. The

colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see

page 45).

• Selects the tuning frequency when “TUNER” is

selected as the input source. The colon (:) is not

displayed in the front panel display (see page 45).

• Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using

NEXT when “TUNER” is not selected as the input

source (see page 35).

7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this

button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset

tuning (see page 47).

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

Note

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

LEVEL

ON/OFF

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

3145687

IJKGFD

(U.S.A. model)

Notes

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L)

Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator

is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is

turned off) (see page 45).

9 ZONE 2 ON/OFF

Turns on Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode

(see page 96).

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is

pressed inward to the ON position.

0 ZONE CONTROL

Switches the zone you want to control between the main

zone and Zone 2 (see page 96).

When Zone 2 is selected, the ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front

panel display for approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is

flashing, perform the desired operation.

A VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.

B PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack

Outputs audio signals for private listening with

headphones (see page 33).

• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the

SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack or the speaker terminals.

• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the

left and right headphone channels.

C SPEAKERS A/B

Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the

FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time

the corresponding button is pressed.

D PRESET/TUNING, EDIT

• Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH l /

h between selecting preset station numbers and

selecting the tuning frequency.

• Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 50).

E STRAIGHT (EFFECT)

Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the

“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-

channel input signals are output directly from their

respective speakers without effect processing (see

page 38).

F FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM when

“TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 45).

G PROGRAM selector

Selects sound field programs or adjusts the bass/treble

balance in conjunction with TONE CONTROL (see

page 32).

H TONE CONTROL

Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left and right

speakers in conjunction with the PROGRAM selector

(see page 32).

I INPUT MODE

Selects either digital or analog input signals exclusively or

sets this unit to automatically detect the type of input

signals and select the corresponding input signals when

one component is connected via both digital and analog

connections (see page 34).

J INPUT selector

Selects the desired input source.

K MULTI CH INPUT

Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 37).

The input source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks takes

priority over the source selected with the INPUT selector on the

front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control).

L VIDEO AUX jacks

Input audio and video signals from a portable external

source such as a game console, a video camera or a

portable audio player (see page 23).

To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select

“V-AUX” as the input source.

• The audio signals input at the PORTABLE mini jack take

priority over the ones input at the AUDIO L/R jacks.

• The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel

take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.

Note

Notes

Note

Notes

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other

components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 90.

• The XM Satellite Radio controlling functions in the following buttons (XM, XM MEMORY, SRCH MODE, DISPLAY, cursor

buttons u / d / j / i, numeric buttons and ENT.) are only applicable to the U.S.A. model and are operational only when “XM” is

selected as the input source. For details, see “XM Satellite Radio controls and functions” on page 53.

• The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area below depends on the component selector switch position. Set the

component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. To control the TUNER functions, set the component selector switch to

SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

■ Controlling this unit

Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this

unit.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate (see page 8).

2 CODE SET

Use to set up remote control codes (see page 92).

3 Input selector buttons

Select the input source you want to control.

The corresponding input selector button for the currently selected

input source lights up for approximately 5 seconds after you press

any buttons on the remote control, showing which source

component is currently being operated.

4 Sound field program selector buttons

Select sound field programs (see page 63).

– Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in

surround (see page 42).

– Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and

6.1-channel playback of multi-channel sources

(see page 41).

– Use DIRECT ST. to play back 2-channel sources in

hi-fi stereo sound (see page 38).

5 SPEAKERS

Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the

FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. Press this

button repeatedly to toggle as follows:

6 ENHANCER

Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode

(see page 36).

7 LEVEL

Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the

output level (see page 35).

Remote control

Notes

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

DISC SKIP

STEREO

EFFECT

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X DV R

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

(U.S.A. model)

Note

A on B on

A and B off

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i, ENTER

Select and adjust the sound field program parameters or

the “SET MENU” parameters.

9 RETURN

Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the

“SET MENU” parameters.

0 TRANSMIT indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared

signals.

A STANDBY

Sets this unit to the standby mode (see page 27).

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the

front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

B POWER

Turns on this unit (see page 27).

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the

front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

C SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer (see page 34).

D MULTI CH IN

Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks as the input source when using an external

decoder, etc. (see page 37).

E VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

F Component selector switch

Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons

in the shaded area.

AMP

Operates this unit.

SOURCE

Operates the component selected with an input

selector button (see page 91).

Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or

(see page 90).

• To set the remote control codes for other components, see

page 92.

• When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and

(see page 92), priority is given to the one set for DTV/

CBL.

G MUTE

Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio

output to the previous volume level (see page 33).

H STRAIGHT (EFFECT)

Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the

“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-

channel input signals are output directly from their

respective speakers without effect processing (see

page 38).

I NIGHT

Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 33).

J SET MENU

Enters “SET MENU” (see page 77).

K DISPLAY

Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video

monitor (see page 40).

Note

Notes

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

■ Controlling the TUNER functions

Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then

press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.

4 Numeric buttons

Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations.

7 BAND

Switches the reception band between FM and AM

(see page 45).

8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i

Press j / i to select a preset station group (A to E) and

u / d to select a preset station number (1 to 8)

(see page 49).

■ Using the remote control

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on this unit during operation.

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types

of conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

Notes

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

30 30

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

DISC SKIP

STEREO

EFFECT

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AUX DVR

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

ON/OFF

LEVEL

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

(U.S.A. model)

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. model and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up only when “XM” is

selected as the input source. For details, see “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 55.

1 Decoder indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the

decoders of this unit function.

The neural indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada

models and lights up only when the Neural Surround decoder is

selected (see page 42).

2 ENHANCER indicator

Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is

turned on (see page 36).

3 Sound field indicators

Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.

4 VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 43).

5 Input source indicators

The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently

selected input source.

6 DOCK indicator

Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod

universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately)

connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit

(see page 22).

7 SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 33).

8 CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field

program (see page 64).

9 AUTO indicator

Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode

(see page 45).

0 TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station

(see page 45).

A STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit

(see page 45).

B MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show that a station can be stored (see page 47).

Front panel display

Note

DVR

DVD

V-AUX

DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

q PL

q EX

q PL

ENHANCER

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA

ZONE2 NIGHT

DOCK

STANDARD

AUTO

PSHOLD RT

EON

PTYPTY

TUNED

MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q PL x

neural

A B

96/24

HiFi DSP

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

STEREO

EIGJK LNMPO

1345768 B

0A9C

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Note

Presence DSP sound field

Listening position

Surround left

DSP sound field

Surround right

DSP sound field

Surround back DSP sound field

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

C VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the current volume level.

D PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code

Modulation) digital audio signals.

E STANDARD indicator

Lights up when the “SUR. STANDARD” or “SUR.

ENHANCED” program is selected (see page 42).

F SP A B indicators

Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.

G Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 33).

H ZONE2 indicator

Lights up when Zone 2 is turned on (see page 96).

I NIGHT indicator

Lights up when you select a night listening mode

(see page 33).

J HiFi DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field

program (see page 64).

K Multi-information display

Shows the name of the current sound field program and

other information when adjusting or changing settings.

L SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 34).

M MUTE indicator

Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 33).

N 96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

O Input channel indicators

Indicate the channel components of the current digital

input signal (see page 29).

P LFE indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.

Q Radio Data System indicators

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Lights up when the Radio Data System data is being

received.

EON

Lights up when the EON data service is being

received.

PTY HOLD

Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System

stations in the PTY SEEK mode.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

1 Video component jacks

See pages 18 and 19 for connection information.

2 Audio component jacks

See page 21 for connection information.

3 MULTI CH INPUT jacks

See page 23 for connection information.

4 ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks

See page 95 for connection information.

These jacks output analog signals only.

5 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack

See page 13 for connection information.

6 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack

See page 21 for connection information.

7 DIGITAL INPUT jacks

See page 19 for connection information.

8 XM jack (U.S.A. model only)

See page 52 for connection information.

9 DOCK terminal

Use to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as

YDS-10 sold separately) where your iPod can be

stationed.

See page 22 for connection information.

0 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

See pages 18 and 19 for connection information.

A REMOTE jacks

See page 95 for details.

B CONTROL OUT jack

This is a control expansion terminal for custom

installation.

C Antenna terminals

See page 24 for connection information.

D Speaker terminals

See page 13 for connection information.

E AC OUTLET(S)

Use to supply power to your other audiovisual

components.

See page 25 for details.

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

See page 25 for details.

Rear panel

AUDIO AUDIO OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT

DVD DVD

COAXIAL

DTV/CBLMD/CD-RMD/CD-R

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

FRONT ZONE 2

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

MD/

CD-R

DVD

MONITOR OUT

DTV/CBL

DVD DVR

COMPONENT VIDEO

RPBY

FM ANT

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

TUNER SPEAKERS

XM DOCK

DTV/CBL

IN OUT

DVR DVD DTV/CBL

IN OUT

DVR

CENTER

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

VIDEO S VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

FRONT

OUTIN

REMOTE CONTROL

OUT

+12V

15mA MAX.

SURROUND

CENTER

SURROUND BACK

PRPBY

OPTICAL OPTICAL

087654321

ABC

(U.S.A. model)

Note

CONNECTIONS

The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R

speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and

multi-channel audio sources.

ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU

(International Telecommunication Union).

Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus

effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance

from the ideal listening position. The distance of each

speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the

same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical

to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,

however, are obtained with the full system. Place the

center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as

close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or

under it.

Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening

position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above

the floor.

Surround back speaker (SB)

The surround back speaker supplements the surround

speakers and provides more realistic front-to-back

transitions. Place this speaker directly behind the listening

position and at the same height as the surround speakers.

Subwoofer (SW)

The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as

the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass

frequencies from any or all channels, but also for hi-fi

stereo sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency

effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS

sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical,

because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it

is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers.

Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce

wall reflections.

CONNECTIONS

Placing speakers

60˚

30˚

80˚

1.8 m (6 ft)

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,

no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be

unnatural and lack bass.

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 27).

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this

unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the

monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor.

• If you are to use 4 or 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit

(see page 26).

• A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a

stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the

plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

• The low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 78 and 79)

are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 79).

Connecting speakers

Notes

CAUTION

OUTPUT

SUB

WOOFER

SPEAKERS

FRONT

SURROUND

CENTER SURROUND BACK

1 2 4 57

Subwoofer

Center

speaker

Front speakers (A)

Surround back

speaker

LeftRight

Surround speakers

Front

speakers

(B)

(U.S.A. model)

CONNECTIONS

FRONT terminals

Connect one or two front speaker systems (1, 2) to these

terminals. If you use only one front speaker system,

connect it to the FRONT A or B terminal.

CENTER terminals

Connect a center speaker (3) to these terminals.

SURROUND terminals

Connect surround speakers (4, 5) to these terminals.

SURROUND BACK terminals

Connect a surround back speaker (6) to these terminals.

SUBWOOFER jack

Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (7) (such as

the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System) to this jack.

Speaker layout

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connecting the speaker cable

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of

insulation from the end of each speaker

cable and then twist the exposed wires of the

cable together to prevent short circuits.

2 Loosen the knob.

3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side

of each terminal.

4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

■ Connecting the banana plug

(except U.K., Europe and Asia models)

The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector

widely used to terminate speaker cables.

1 Tighten the knob.

2 Insert the banana plug connector into the

end of the corresponding terminal.

10 mm (0.4 in)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug

CONNECTIONS

You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL

and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz

sampling digital signals.

■ Audio jacks

This unit has four types of audio jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other

components.

AUDIO jacks

For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left

and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the

right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.

DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital

audio cables.

DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital

audio cables.

Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber

optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the

optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects

the jack from dust.

PORTABLE jack

For analog audio signals transmitted via stereo analog

audio mini cables.

■ Video jacks

This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your video

monitor. When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see

page 85), the video signals input at the VIDEO and S

VIDEO jacks are converted and output at the VIDEO, S

VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

interchangeably.

VIDEO jacks

For conventional composite video signals transmitted via

composite video cables.

S VIDEO jacks

For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and

chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate

wires of S-video cables.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component video signals, separated into the

luminance (Y) and chrominance (P

B, PR) video signals

transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.

Information on jacks and cable plugs

Note

VIDEO S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y PB PR

COAXIAL

DIGITAL AUDIO

AUDIO

PORTABLE

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO

Left and right

analog audio

cable plugs

Optical

digital

audio cable

plug

Coaxial

digital audio

cable plug

Composite

video cable

plug

S-video

cable plug

Component

video cable

plugs

Stereo

analog

audio

mini cable

plug

Audio jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs

(Red)(White) (Orange) (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)

Note

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Audio signal flow for AUDIO OUT (REC)

This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus, audio signals input at the analog jacks are output only at the analog

AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise, audio signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are output only at the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.

■ Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT

When video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input signals is as

follows where the video signals input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks have the top priority:

COMPONENT VIDEO > S VIDEO > VIDEO

Audio and video signal flow

Note

DIGITAL AUDIO

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO

COAXIAL

PORTABLE

AUDIO

RLRL

Digital output

Output

AUDIO OUT (REC)

Input

Analog output

Digital audio

Analog audio

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Y P

Through

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Input

Video conversion when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 85)

Analog video

CONNECTIONS

Connect your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the COMPONENT

VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit.

Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between

components are complete.

Connecting a TV

CAUTION

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO S VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

PRPBY

PRPB

(U.S.A. model)

S-video in

Component video in

Video in

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Connect your DVD player, DVD recorder, VCR or STB (set-top box) using the same type of video connections as those

made for your TV (see page 18). The cable TV receiver and the satellite receiver are examples of the STB.

Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between

components are complete.

• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 85), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV

(see page 18). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other

components to the VIDEO jacks.

• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 85), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When

recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component.

• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL

OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT”

(see page 83).

• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is

given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.

■ Connecting a DVD player

Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB

Notes

CAUTION

AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT

DVD DVD

COAXIAL

DVD

COMPONENT VIDEO

RPBY

DVD

VIDEO S VIDEO

OPTICAL

RPBY

DVD player

Optical audio out

Coaxial audio out

Video out

Audio out

S-video out

Component video out

(U.S.A. model)

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting a DVD recorder or a VCR

■ Connecting an STB

AUDIO

DVR

COMPONENT VIDEO

IN OUT

DVR

IN OUT

DVR

VIDEO S VIDEO

PRPBY

LR LR

PRPBY

DVD recorder or

VCR

Audio in

Audio out

Video in

Video out

Component video out

S-video in

S-video out

(U.S.A. model)

AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT

DTV/CBL

COMPONENT VIDEO

RPBY

DTV/CBL DTV/CBL

VIDEO S VIDEO

OPTICAL

RPBY

Cable TV receiver or

satellite receiver

Optical audio out

Component video out

Video out

Audio out

S-video out

(U.S.A. model)

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Connect your CD player, MD player or tape deck via analog and/or digital connections.

Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between

components are complete.

To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL

OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT”

(see page 83).

Connecting a CD player, an MD player or a tape deck

Note

CAUTION

AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT

MD/CD-RMD/CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

MD/

CD-R

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL OPTICAL

LR LR

CD player

MD recorder or

tape deck

(U.S.A. model)

Audio out

Audio in

Optical audio out

Optical audio in

CONNECTIONS

This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal

dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the

supplied remote control. Connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) to the DOCK

terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. Once the connection is complete, station your iPod in the

YAMAHA iPod universal dock.

Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between

components are complete.

• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.

• You need a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) and its dedicated cable compatible with the DOCK

terminal of this unit.

• Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of

this unit, this unit begins the signal transmission with your iPod.

• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK

indicator lights up in the front panel display. If the connection between your iPod and this unit fails, a status message appears in the

front panel display. For a complete list of connection status messages, see the iPod section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 105.

• Only analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the

analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.

• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold

separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on.

• Depending on the type of iPod, you may need to insert one of the iPod adapters supplied with a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such

as YDS-10 sold separately) into the dock slot before you station your iPod.

Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock

Notes

CAUTION

DOCK

YAMAHA iPod universal dock

(such as YDS-10 sold separately)

(U.S.A. model)

iPod

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks

(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a

multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor.

Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or

external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure

to match the left and right output jacks to the left and right

input jacks for the front and surround channels.

Do not connect this unit or other components to

the AC power supply until all connections

between components are complete.

• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 37), this unit

automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and

you cannot select sound field programs.

• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We

recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker

system before using this feature.

• When headphones are used, signals are output only from the

front left and right channels.

Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a

game console, a video camera or a portable audio player to

this unit.

Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and

other components before making connections.

• The audio signals input at the PORTABLE mini jack take

priority over the ones input at the AUDIO L/R jacks.

• The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal takes priority

over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.

Connecting a multi-format player

or an external decoder

Notes

CAUTION

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

FRONT

CENTER

MULTI CH INPUT

L R L R

Multi-format player or

external decoder

Front out

Surround out

Subwoofer out

Center out

Connecting a game console, a

video camera or a portable audio

player

Notes

CAUTION

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

ON OFF

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

LEVEL

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

Game console or

video camera

Audio out L/R

Video out

Portable audio

player

Audio out

(U.S.A. model)

CONNECTIONS

Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this

unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient

signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the

designated terminals.

• Be sure to set the tuner frequency step (Asia and General

models only) according to the frequency spacing in your area

(see page 89).

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,

install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized

YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Set up the AM loop antenna.

2 Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT

terminal.

3 Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires

into the AM ANT terminal.

4 Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal back

into place.

5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the

other lead wire to the GND terminal.

Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to

this unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception

when you tune into AM stations (see page 45).

Connecting the FM and AM antennas

Notes

FM ANT

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

TUNER

AM loop antenna

(supplied)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and

minimum interference,

connect the antenna

GND

terminal to a good earth

ground. A good earth ground

is a metal stake driven into

moist earth.

Indoor FM antenna

(supplied)

(U.S.A. model)

Outdoor AM antenna

Use a 5 to 10 m (16.4 to 32.8 ft) of

vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors

from a window.

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet.

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of

this unit must be set for your local voltage

BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC

wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE

SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and

create a potential fire hazard.

Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or

counterclockwise to the correct position using a

straight slot screwdriver.

Voltages are as follows:

Asia model .........................220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

General model ......110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet

Korea model ............................................................... None

Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets

Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected

components. Connect the power cable of your other

components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is

supplied when the main zone or Zone 2 is turned on.

However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when the main

zone and Zone 2 are turned off or when MASTER ON/

OFF on the front panel is pressed and released outward to

the OFF position. For information on the maximum power

or the total power consumption of the components that can

be connected to these outlet(s), see “SPECIFICATIONS”

on page 109.

Connecting the power cable

AC OUTLETS

To the AC wall outlet

(U.S.A. model)

CAUTION

230-

240V

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

Voltage indication

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, the stored data will be lost in case the power

cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the

power supply is cut off for more than one week.

CONNECTIONS

If you are to use 4 or 6 ohm speakers, set “SP

IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this

unit.

1 Make sure this unit is turned off.

See page 27 for details about turning on or off this

unit.

2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the

front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF

inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front

panel to select “SP IMP.”.

The following display appears in the front panel

display.

4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front

panel repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”.

The following display appears in the front panel

display.

5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to save

the new setting and turn off this unit.

The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this

unit.

Setting the speaker impedance

CAUTION

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING/CH

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

32,4

2,5

LEVEL

(U.S.A. model)

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

ON OFF

While holding

down

PROGRAM

SP IMP.-8 MIN

Note

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

SP IMP.-6 MIN

MASTER

ON OFF

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

When all connections are complete, turn on this unit.

■ Turning on this unit

Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward

to the ON position to turn on this unit.

• Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or

STANDBY on the remote control) to set the main

zone to the standby mode.

• Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or

POWER on the remote control) to turn on the main

zone.

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as

POWER and STANDBY on the remote control are

operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward

to the ON position.

■ Turning off this unit

Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel again

to release it outward to the OFF position to turn

off this unit.

Turning on and off the power

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING/CH

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

LEVEL

AMP

SOURCE

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X D VR

(U.S.A. model) (U.S.A. model)

MASTER ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF

STANDBY

POWER

Note

MASTER

ON OFF

Front panel

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

STANDBY

Front panel Remote control

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

POWER

Front panel

Remote control

MASTER

ON OFF

Front panel

BASIC SETUP

The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort.

• Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit.

• If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU” (see

page 78).

• Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 78).

• Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter.

• Press RETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level.

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP.

2 Press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

3 Press u / d to select “BASIC SETUP”.

4 Press ENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP”.

The following display appears in the OSD.

5 Press u / d to select “ROOM” and then j / i

to select the desired setting.

Select the size of the room where you have installed

your speakers. In general, the room sizes are defined

as follows:

Choices: S, M, L

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

S (small) 16 x 13ft, 200ft

(4.8 x 4.0m, 20m

)

M (medium) 20 x 16ft, 300ft

(6.3 x 5.0m, 30m

)

L (large) 26 x 19ft, 450ft

(7.9 x 5.8m, 45m

)

[Other models]

S (small) 3.6 x 2.8m, 10m

M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0m, 20m

L (large) 6.3 x 5.0m, 30m

BASIC SETUP

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X D VR

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDI O

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

3-12

2,13

(U.S.A. model)

AMP

SOURCE

SET MENU

SRCH MODE



SET MENU

.;BASICSETUP

;MANUALSETUP

.;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

;BASIC SETUP

.ROOM: S >M L

SUBWOOFER;;;;YES

SPEAKERS;;;;6spk

SETUP:>OK CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

;BASIC SETUP

.ROOM: S >M L

SUBWOOFER;;;;YES

SPEAKERS;;;;6spk

SETUP:>OK CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

BASIC SETUP

PREPARATION

6 Press d to select “SUBWOOFER” and then

j / i to select the desired setting.

Choices: YES, NONE

• Select “YES” if you have a subwoofer in your

system.

• Select “NONE” if you do not have a subwoofer in

your system.

7 Press d to select “SPEAKERS” and then j / i

to select the number of speakers connected

to this unit.

8 Press d to select “SETUP” and then j / i to

select the desired setting.

Choices: OK, CANCEL

• Select “OK” to apply the settings you made.

• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the setup procedure

without making any changes.

You can also press SET MENU to cancel the setup

procedure.

9 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.

If you selected “OK” in step 8, each speaker outputs a

test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:Test Tone” appears

in the OSD for a few seconds and then “CHECK

OK?” appears in the OSD.

Check the speaker connections (see page 13) and adjust the

“SPEAKERS” settings back in step 7, if necessary.

Choice Display Speakers

2spk

Front L/R

3spk

Front L/R, Center

4spk

Front L/R, Surround L/R

5spk

Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R

6spk

Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,

Surround back

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

;BASIC SETUP

ROOM: S >M L

.SUBWOOFER;;;;YES

SPEAKERS;;;;6spk

SETUP:>OK CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

;BASIC SETUP

ROOM: S >M L

SUBWOOFER;;;;YES

.SPEAKERS;;;;6spk

SETUP:>OK CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

LL C R

SL SB SR

LL C R

SL SB SR

LL CR

SL SB SR

LL C R

SL SB SR

LL C R

SL SB

LL C R

SL SB SR

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

;BASIC SETUP

ROOM: S >M L

SUBWOOFER;;;;YES

SPEAKERS;;;;6spk

. SETUP:>OK CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

;BASIC SETUP

ROOM: S >M L

SUBWOOFER;;;;YES

SPEAKERS;;;;6spk

SETUP:>OK CANCEL

.CHECK:Test Tone

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

;BASIC SETUP

ROOM: S >M L

SUBWOOFER;;;;YES

SPEAKERS;;;;6spk

SETUP:>OK CANCEL

.CHECK OK?;;;;YES

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

BASIC SETUP

10 Press j / i to select the desired setting.

Choices: YES, NO

• Select “YES” to complete the setup procedure if

the test tone levels from each speaker were

satisfactory.

• Select “NO” to proceed to the speaker level

adjustment menu in step 12 to balance the output

level of each speaker.

11 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.

• If you selected “YES” in step 10, the setup

procedure is completed and the display returns to

the top “SET MENU” display.

• If you selected “NO” in step 10, the front speaker

level adjustment display appears in the front panel

display.

12 Press u / d to select a speaker and then j / i

to adjust the balance.

The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the

surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn.

•Press i to increase the value.

•Press j to decrease the value.

• Select “FR” to adjust the balance between the front

left and right speakers.

• Select “C” to adjust the balance between the front

left and center speakers.

• Select “SL” to adjust the balance between the front

left and surround left speakers.

• Select “SB” to adjust the balance between the

surround left and surround back speakers.

• Select “SR” to adjust the balance between the

surround left and surround right speakers.

• Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance between the

front left speaker and the subwoofer.

13 Press SET MENU to exit from “BASIC

SETUP”.

;BASIC SETUP

ROOM: S >M L

SUBWOOFER;;;;YES

SPEAKERS;;;;6spk

SETUP:>OK CANCEL

.CHECK OK?;;;;YES

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

;BASIC SETUP

. FR;;;;;;;;;;

 C;;;;;;;;;;

 SL;;;;;;;;;;

SB;;;;;;;;;;

SR;;;;;;;;;;

SWFR;;;;;;;;;;

[]/[]:Select

[<]/[>]:Adjust

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD

encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may

damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the

sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel

(or set the component selector switch to

AMP and then press SPEAKERS on the

remote control repeatedly).

Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B, the

respective speakers are turned on or off.

3 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or press one of the input selector buttons on

the remote control) to select the desired

input source.

The name of the currently selected input source

appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for

a few seconds.

• If you are to select an input source connected via digital

connections, set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”

(see page 34).

• For details about controlling XM Satellite Radio when

“XM” is selected as the input source, see page 55.

4 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

Refer to the operating instructions for the source

component.

See page 45 for details about tuning instructions.

PLAYBACK

CAUTION

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

66,7 32 5

LEVEL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDI O

DISC SKIP

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X D VR

(U.S.A. model)

SPEAKERS

AMP

SOURCE

Front panel

Remote control

Notes

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X DV R

INPUT

Front panel Remote control

DVR

DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

DVD AUTO

Currently selected

input source

Currently selected

input mode

Available input sources

PLAYBACK

5 Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press

VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust

the volume to the desired output level.

6 Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel

repeatedly to select “TREBLE” or “BASS”

and then rotate the PROGRAM selector to

adjust the corresponding frequency

response level.

• Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency

response.

• Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency

response.

• Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored

independently.

• When “TONE BYPASS” is set to “AUTO” (see page 82),

and “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB, audio output

automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry of this

unit.

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of

the surround speakers may not match that of the front left

and right speakers.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective when the “DIRECT

STEREO” mode (see page 38) is selected or when the

component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is

selected as the input source (see page 37).

• To enjoy multi-channel sources in surround, see page 41

for details.

7 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front

panel (or press one of the sound field

program selector buttons on the remote

control repeatedly) to select the desired

sound field program.

The name of the selected sound field program appears

in the front panel display and in the OSD.

See page 64 for details about sound field programs.

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening

preference, not merely on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically

selects the last sound field program used with the

corresponding input source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the

component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is

selected as the input source (see page 37).

• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS

96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound

field programs are applied.

• To display information about the currently selected input

source in the OSD, see page 39 for details.

Notes

VOLUME

Remote control

Front panel

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

DVR

DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

TREBLE 0dB

Notes

PROGRAM

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

Front panel

Remote control

DVR

DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

TV Sports

Currently selected

surround field program

USING AUDIO FEATURES

BASIC

OPERATION

SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS

sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA

activates automatically whenever you connect headphones

to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or

HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 64). When

activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the

front panel display.

• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the

input source (see page 37).

• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the “DIRECT

STEREO” (see page 38) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 38) is

selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see

page 38).

Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the

audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the

audio output.

• You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or VOLUME

+/– on the remote control to resume the audio output.

• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTING TYPE”

parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 82).

• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the

audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel

display when the audio output is resumed.

If you change the input source or the sound field program while

the audio output is being muted, this unit resumes the audio

output.

The night listening modes are designed to improve

listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either

“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on

the type of material you are playing.

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press NIGHT on the remote control

repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or

“NIGHT:MUSIC”.

Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF

• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.

• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music

sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.

When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the

effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or

“NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front

panel display.

Choices: MIN, MID, MAX

• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.

• Select “MID” for standard compression.

• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.

USING AUDIO FEATURES

Using SILENT CINEMA

Notes

Muting the audio output

Note

MUTE

Selecting the night listening mode

NIGHT

AMP

SOURCE

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Effect.Lvl:MID

USING AUDIO FEATURES

“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are

stored independently.

• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following

cases:

– when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode (see page 38) is

selected.

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see

page 37).

– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness

depending on the input source and surround sound settings

you use.

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the

following to select the type of input signals you want to

use.

• We recommend setting “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” in most

cases.

• You can adjust the default input mode of this unit by using the

“INPUT MODE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (see page 84).

• To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio

connection, be sure to set “INPUT MODE” to “DTS”.

• DTS decoding may not be performed correctly depending on

the player even if you make a digital connection between this

unit and the player.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

to select the desired input source.

2 Press INPUT MODE on the front panel

repeatedly to select the desired input mode.

AUTO Automatically selects input signals in

the following order:

(1) Digital signals

(2) Analog signals

DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in

DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no

sound is output.

ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no

analog signals are input, no sound is

output.

When “INPUT MODE” is set to “AUTO”, this unit

automatically switches to the appropriate decoder if a Dolby

Digital or DTS signal is detected.

Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to AC OUTLET(S) (see page 25).

1 Press one of the input selector buttons on

the remote control to select the desired input

source.

2 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

Refer to the operating instructions for the source

component.

See page 45 for details about tuning instructions.

Notes

Selecting the input mode

Notes

INPUT

INPUT MODE

DVR

DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

DVD AUTO

Currently selected

input source

Currently selected

input mode

Available input sources

Note

Using the sleep timer

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X DV R

USING AUDIO FEATURES

BASIC

OPERATION

3 Press SLEEP on the remote control

repeatedly to set the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching

the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep

timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front

panel display, and the display returns to the selected

sound field program.

4 To cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP on

the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP

OFF” appears in the front panel display.

The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”

disappears from the front panel display after a few

seconds.

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

STANDBY on the remote control (or MAIN ZONE ON/

OFF on the front panel) to set the main zone to the standby

mode.

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source. This is also possible when

playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

This operation will override the level adjustments made in

“BASIC SETUP” (see page 28) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see

page 80).

This operation can also be performed using the control buttons on

the front panel. Press NEXT on the front panel repeatedly to

select the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust

and then press LEVEL +/– on the front panel to adjust the output

level.

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press LEVEL on the remote control

repeatedly to select the speaker you want to

adjust.

• Select “FRONT L” to adjust the front left speaker

output level.

• Select “CENTER” to adjust the center speaker

output level.

• Select “FRONT R” to adjust the front right speaker

output level.

• Select “SUR. R” to adjust the surround right

speaker output level.

• Select “SUR. B” to adjust the surround back

speaker output level.

• Select “SUR. L” to adjust the surround left speaker

output level.

• Select “SWFR” to adjust the subwoofer output

level.

Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can also

select the speaker by pressing u / d.

SLEEP

SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF

SLEEP 120min

DVR DVD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

SLEEP

SLEEP 120min

Flashes

DVR DVD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

SLEEP

STRAIGHT

Lights up

SLEEP

DVR DVD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

SLEEP OFF

Adjusting the speaker level

Note

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

DISC SKIP

STEREO

EFFECT

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

(U.S.A. model)

AMP

SOURCE

TITLE

LEVEL

BAND

USING AUDIO FEATURES

2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the

speaker output level.

• Press i to increase the value.

• Press j to decrease the value.

Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB

3 Press ENTER on the remote control when

you have completed your adjustment.

Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are

created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is

resampled to lower the bitrate and to remove sounds that

are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The

Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances

your listening experience by regenerating the missing

harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened

complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as

well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass

is compensated, providing the improved performance of

the overall sound system.

• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is compatible with the

PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz) and the analog 2-

channel input sources.

• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with

any of the sound field programs.

• When the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on while

an incompatible input source is being played back, “Not

Available” appears in the front panel display and in the OSD.

• When the input source is changed to an incompatible input

source while the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned

on, the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is automatically

turned off and the incompatible input source is played back in

2-channel or 6-channel stereo.

The ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display

when one of the Compressed Music Enhancer modes is selected.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Selecting the Compressed Music

Enhancer mode

Notes

USING AUDIO FEATURES

BASIC

OPERATION

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press ENHANCER on the remote

control repeatedly to select the desired

Compressed Music Enhancer mode.

The following display is shown in the OSD and the

ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel

display.

Choices: 2ch Stereo, 6ch Stereo, Off

• Select “2ch Stereo” to play back compression

artifacts in 2-channel stereo.

• Select “6ch Stereo” to play back compression

artifacts in 6.1-channel stereo.

• Select “Off

” to turn off the Compressed Music

Enhancer mode.

When you select “Off ”, this unit returns to the previously

selected sound field program.

2 Press j / i on the remote control to select the

desired effect level.

Choices: HIGH, LOW

• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.

• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.

Set the effect level to “HIGH” or “LOW” according to the

characteristics of a source. The high-frequency signals of

some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, se

the effect level to “LOW”.

Use this feature to select the component connected to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 23) as the input

source.

Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or

MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that

“MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel

display.

When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display,

no other source can be played. To select another input source with

the INPUT selector on the front panel (or one of the input selector

buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the

remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” disappears from the

front panel display.

Note

ENHANCER

MUSIC ENHANCER

2ch Stereo

. LOW >HIGH

ENHANCER

AMP

SOURCE

Lights up

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT

component

Note

MULTI CH

INPUT

MULTI CH IN

Front panel

Remote control

MULTI CH INPUT

USING AUDIO FEATURES

You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels

and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.

Set the component selector switch to AMP and

then press STEREO on the remote control

repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”.

• You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS

OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 79).

• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the

PROGRAM selector on the front panel.

When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel

stereo sources are output from only the front left and right

speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into

the appropriate channels without any additional effect

processing.

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press STRAIGHT on the remote

control to select “STRAIGHT”.

2 To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press

STRAIGHT on the remote control again so

that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front

panel display.

The sound effect is turned back on.

You can also select the “STRAIGHT” mode by pressing

STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel.

The “DIRECT STEREO” mode allows sources to bypass

the decoders and DSP processors of this unit so that you

can enjoy pure hi-fi sound from 2-channel PCM and

analog sources.

Set the component selector switch to AMP and

then press DIRECT ST. on the remote control to

select “DIRECT STEREO”.

• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play CDs encoded in DTS

when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode is selected.

• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input,

this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog

input. When “DTS” is selected as the input mode (see page 34),

no sound will be output.

• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.

• “TONE CONTROL” (see page 32) and “SOUND MENU” (see

page 78) settings (except for speaker level settings) are not

effective.

• The front panel display automatically dims.

You can also select the “DIRECT STEREO” mode by rotating the

PROGRAM selector on the front panel.

Enjoying multi-channel sources in

2-channel stereo

Enjoying unprocessed input

sources

STEREO

AMP

SOURCE

2ch Stereo

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

ENT.

AMP

SOURCE

STRAIGHT

Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

DIRECT ST.

DIRECT STEREO

USING VIDEO FEATURES

BASIC

OPERATION

You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,

bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press SET MENU on the remote

control.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press d repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO”

and then press ENTER.

The following information about the input source

appears in the OSD.

Signal format FORMAT

Signal format display. When this unit cannot detect a

digital signal, it automatically switches to analog

input.

Display status: Analog, Digital, Dolby D, DTS, PCM,

---

“---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals.

Sampling frequency SAMPLING

The number of samples per second taken from a

continuous signal to make a discrete signal.

Display status: 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 64kHz,

88.2kHz, 96kHz, ---

“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling

frequency.

Channel CHANNEL

The number of source channels in the input signal

(front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel

soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround

channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”.

“---” appears when there is no source channel available.

Bit rate BITRATE

The number of bits passing a given point per second.

“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate.

Flag FLAG

Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM

signals that cue this unit to automatically switch

decoders.

3 Press SET MENU on the remote control again

to exit from “SET MENU”.

USING VIDEO FEATURES

Displaying the input source

information



SET MENU

.;BASICSETUP

;MANUALSETUP

.;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

AMP

SOURCE

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

;SIGNAL INFO

FORMAT PCM

SAMPLING 48kHz

CHANNEL 2/0/---

BITRATE ---

FLAG NONE



A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Note

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

USING VIDEO FEATURES

You can display the operating information of this unit on a

video monitor. If you display the “SET MENU” and sound

field program parameter settings on a video monitor, it is

much easier to see the available options and parameters

than it is to read the information in the front panel display.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press DISPLAY on the remote

control repeatedly to toggle between the

OSD modes.

The OSD mode changes in the following order.

Full display

Fully shows the sound field program parameter

settings as well as the contents of the front panel

display.

Short display

Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display

at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this

unit.

Display off

No information is displayed except for the “SET

MENU” screen.

You can display a gray background in the OSD when there

is not video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK” in

“OPTION MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 86).

• The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT jacks and

will not be recorded.

• You must set “VIDEO CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to

“ON” (see page 85) to display the OSD.

• To display the OSD with the component video signals

output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT

jacks, set the OSD mode to the full display mode.

• When “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” is set to

“OFF” (see page 86), the OSD may not be displayed

correctly depending on the conditions of the picture.

You can combine a video image from a video source with

sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while viewing beautiful

scenery from the video source on the video monitor.

Press the input selector buttons on the remote

control to select a video source and then an

audio source.

If you want to enjoy an audio source input at the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video

source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or

MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to select the component

connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source

(see page 37).

Selecting the OSD mode

DISPLAY

AMP

SOURCE

Full display

Short display

Display off

P02 MUSIC

. Pop/Rock

DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB

P.INIT.DLY;;21ms

P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0

S.INIT.DLY;;25ms

S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0

P02 MUSIC

Pop/Rock

Full display Short display

Notes

Playing video sources in the

background

Note

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X DV R

CD CD-R

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X DV R

Audio sources

Video sources

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

BASIC

OPERATION

If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature

to enjoy 6.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources

using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or

DTS-ES decoders.

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press EXTD SUR. on the remote

control repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and

6.1-channel playback.

2 Press j / i repeatedly to select a decoder

while “PLIIxMusic” (etc.) is displayed.

Auto AUTO

When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is

input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back

the signal in 6.1 channels.

If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present

in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1

channels.

Decoders

You can select from the following decoders depending on

the format of the source you are playing.

Off OFF

Decoders are not used to create 6.1 channels.

• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag

that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing

these kinds of discs in 6.1 channels, select a decoder manually

from “PLIIx Music”, “EX/ES” or “EX”.

• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press EXTD

SUR. in the following cases:

– when “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 79) or “SUR. B SP” (see

page 79) is set to “NONE”.

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is being played.

– when the source being played does not contain surround left

and right channel signals.

– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

– when the “2ch Stereo” (see page 38) or “DIRECT STEREO”

(see page 38) mode is selected.

• When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to

“AUTO”.

• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is

set to “NONE” (see page 79).

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

Enjoying multi-channel sources in

surround

EXTD SUR.

AMP

SOURCE

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Decoder Functions

PLIIxMusic

Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals

in 6.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx

music decoder.

EX/ES

Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals

in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital

EX or DTS-ES decoder.

Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals

in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital

EX decoder.

Notes

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played

back on multi-channels.

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press STANDARD on the remote

control repeatedly to switch between the

“SUR. STANDARD” and “SUR. ENHANCED”

programs or press MOVIE to select the

“MOVIE THEATER” program.

2 Press SELECT on the remote control

repeatedly to select the desired decoder.

You can select from the following modes depending

on the type of source you are playing and your

personal preference.

You can also select a decoder by pressing j / i on the remote

control while the decoder type is displayed in the front panel

display.

• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is

set to “NONE” (see page 79).

• The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with the PCM

signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz) and the analog 2-

channel input sources.

• The Neural Surround decoder is not effective with any of the

sound field programs.

• When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input

while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multi-channel

sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels

without any additional effect processing and the Neural

Surround-incompatible PCM signals are played back in stereo.

Enjoying 2-channel sources in

surround

AMP

SOURCE

STANDARD

MOVIE

SELECT

SUR. STANDARD Functions

PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any

sources

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for

movie sources

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for

music sources

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for

game sources

PLIIx Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for

movie sources

PLIIx Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for

music sources

PLIIx Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for

game sources

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie sources

Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music sources

Neural Sur.

Neural Surround processing for any

sources

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

SUR. ENHANCED

MOVIE THEATER

Functions

PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any

sources

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for

movie sources

PLIIx Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for

movie sources

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie sources

Notes

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

BASIC

OPERATION

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates

virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.

If you set “SUR. L/R SP”

to “NONE” (see page 79),

Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever

you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see

page 64).

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R

SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 79) in the following cases:

– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks is selected as the input source (see page 37).

– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

– when the “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 38) or “2ch Stereo”

mode (see page 38) is selected, or when this unit is in the

“STRAIGHT” mode (see page 38).

Using Virtual CINEMA DSP

Note

RECORDING

Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating

instructions for those components.

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in

noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the

following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs

(when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating

instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player.

• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.

• The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 32), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 80) and the sound field programs (see

page 64) do not affect the recorded material.

• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing

video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an

S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.

• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,

analog signals input at the AUDIO IN or PORTABLE jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source

component is connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.

• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright

laws.

• The XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only) signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.

• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.

Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

1 Turn on all the connected components.

2 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or press one of the input selector buttons on

the remote control) to select the source

component you want to record from.

3 Start playback on the selected source

component or select a broadcast station.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

RECORDING

Notes

If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture

itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

CAUTION

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

LEVEL

AMP

SOURCE

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X D VR

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X DV R

Front panel Remote control

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and

there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use

the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of

the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset

stations with each other.

Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”

as the input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that

the AUTO indicator lights up in the front

panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the

colon (:) off.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to

begin automatic tuning.

When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED

indicator lights up and the frequency of the received

station is shown in the front panel display.

•Press h to tune into a higher frequency.

•Press l to tune into a lower frequency.

FM/AM TUNING

Note

Automatic tuning

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

3 312 4

LEVEL

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

Front panel

FM/AM

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

AUTO TUNED

VOLUME

A AM 1440 kHz

Lights upNo colon (:)

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

AUTO TUNED

VOLUME

A AM 1530 kHz

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

LEVEL

Lights up

FM/AM TUNING

If the signal received from the station you want to select is

weak, tune into it manually.

Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the

tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”

as the input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that

the AUTO indicator disappears from the front

panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the

colon (:) off.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune

into the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to continue searching.

Manual tuning

Note

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

3 312 4

LEVEL

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

Front panel

FM/AM

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

TUNED

VOLUME

A AM 1440 kHz

No colon (:)

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

LEVEL

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8

preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station

groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any

preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”

as the input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception

band.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for more than 3 seconds.

The preset station number as well as the MEMORY

and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5

seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current

frequency and proceeds toward the higher

frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

You can specify the preset number from which this unit

stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower

frequencies. For details, see “Automatic preset tuning

options” on page 48.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station

number is cleared when you store a new station under the

same preset station number.

• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),

automatic preset tuning automatically stops after

searching for all the available stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station

you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it

manually and store it as described in “Manual preset

tuning” on page 48.

Automatic preset tuning

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

132

LEVEL

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

Front panel

FM/AM

Notes

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

AUTO TUNED

VOLUME

MEMORY

A1:FM 87.5 MHz

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

Flashes

Flash

FM/AM TUNING

■ Automatic preset tuning options

You can specify the preset number from which this unit

stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower

frequencies.

First carry out steps 1 through 3 in “Automatic preset tuning” on

page 47.

• Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING/

CH l / h to select the preset station number

under which the first station will be stored.

Automatic preset tuning stops when stations have all

been stored up to E8.

• Press PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:)

disappears from the front panel display and

then press PRESET/TUNING/CH l to begin

tuning toward lower frequencies.

You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset

station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)

manually.

1 Tune into a station automatically or manually.

See pages 45 and 46 for tuning instructions.

When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel

display shows the frequency of the station received.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 5 seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset

station group (A to E) while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

The selected preset station group letter appears.

Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel

display.

Note

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

LEVEL

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

LEVEL

Manual preset tuning

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

43 2,5

LEVEL

(U.S.A. model)

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

TUNED

VOLUME

A AM 630 kHz

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

Flashes

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

TUNED

VOLUME

MEMORY

C :AM 630 kHz

Preset station

group

Flashes

Colon (:)

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

• Press h to select a higher preset station number.

• Press l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The station band and frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset station group and

number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator

disappears from the front panel display.

6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other

stations.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset station

number is cleared when you store a new station under the

same preset station number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along

with the station frequency.

You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting

the preset station group and number under which it was

stored.

When performing this operation with the remote control, set the

component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER

to select “TUNER” as the input source.

1 Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or A-E/

CAT. j / i on the remote control) to select the

desired preset station group (A to E).

The preset station group letter appears in the front

panel display and changes each time you press the

button.

Notes

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

LEVEL

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

TUNED

VOLUME

MEMORY

C3:AM 630 kHz

Preset station number

Flashes

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

TUNED

VOLUME

C3:AM 630 kHz

The displayed station has been stored as C3.

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

Selecting preset stations

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

LEVEL

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

(U.S.A. model)

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Front panel

Remote control

FM/AM TUNING

2 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the

front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the

remote control) to select the desired preset

station number (1 to 8).

The preset station group and number appear in the

front panel display along with the station band and

frequency.

You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E

and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.

See “Selecting preset stations” on page 49.

2 Press and hold EDIT for more than 3

seconds.

“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

LEVEL

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

TUNED

VOLUME

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Front panel

Remote control

Exchanging preset stations

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

2,4 1,3

LEVEL

(U.S.A. model)

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

TUNED

VOLUME

MEMORY

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

Flashes

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E

and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.

“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

See “Selecting preset stations” on page 49.

4 Press EDIT again.

“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and

the assignments of the two preset stations are

exchanged.

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

TUNED

VOLUME

MEMORY

A5:FM 90.6 MHz

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

LEVEL

Flashes

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

TUNED

VOLUME

EDIT E1-A5

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

XM Satellite Radio is the satellite radio service with millions of listeners across the United States, broadcasting live

daily. The XM Satellite Radio channel lineup includes more than 150 digital channels of choice from coast to coast: 67

commercial-free music channels, featuring hip hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33 channels of

premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels of the traffic and

weather information for major metropolitan areas nationwide.

Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you will need to set up an account and activate service with XM

using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio” on

page 54. For further information on XM Satellite Radio services, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at

“http://www.xmradio.com/”.

This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) that plays back the surround

sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience.

• The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii).

• XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory and monthly subscription are sold separately. For details, visit the XM Satellite Radio

website at “http://www.xmradio.com/”.

• For information on obtaining the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at

“http://www.xmradio.com/” or consult your local retailer that sells XM Ready products.

• To ensure the optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory must be placed

at or near a southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors.

■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc.

Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold separately. Premium Channel available at additional monthly cost. Installation

costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and

programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL”. Channel blocking is available for

XM radio receivers by calling “1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)”. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at

trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Connect the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this

unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory.

SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

Notes

Connecting the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory

XM Connect-and-Play

digital antenna accessory

(sold separately)

(U.S.A. model)

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

The following controls are available only when “XM” is selected as the input source. Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or

set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source.

■ Front panel functions

1 SEARCH MODE

Changes the search mode between the All Channel

Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes

(see page 56).

2 CATEGORY

(All Channel Search mode)

Changes the channel category while staying in the All

Channel Search mode.

(Category Search mode)

Changes the channel category.

(Preset Search mode)

Changes the preset channel group (A to E).

3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

(All Channel Search mode)

Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold

for quick search.

(Category Search mode)

Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press

and hold for quick search.

(Preset Search mode)

Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8).

4 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 60).

5 DISPLAY

Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as

channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or

song title displayed in the front panel display or in the

OSD (see page 61).

■ Remote control functions

1 XM

Selects “XM” as the input source.

2 Numeric buttons

(All Channel Search or Category Search mode)

Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly.

(Preset Search mode)

Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly.

3 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i

(All Channel Search mode)

Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the channel category.

Press PRESET/CH u / d to search for a channel within

all channels. Press and hold for quick search.

(Category Search mode)

Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the channel category.

Press PRESET/CH u / d to search for a channel within

the selected category. Press and hold for quick search.

(Preset Search mode)

Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the preset channel group

(A to E).

Press PRESET/CH u / d to change the preset channel

number (1 to 8).

4 XM MEMORY

Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 60).

5 ENT.

Confirms an entered channel number in the Direct

Number Access mode (see page 59).

6 SRCH MODE

Changes the search mode between the All Channel

Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes

(see page 56).

7 DISPLAY

Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as

channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or

song title displayed in the front panel display or in the

OSD (see page 61).

XM Satellite Radio controls and functions

Note

DISPLAYCATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

PEAKERS

MULTI CH

INPUT

12345

LEVEL

(U.S.A. model)

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

AMP

SOURCE

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-A UX DV R

(U.S.A. model)

Set to SOURCE.

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio

service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required.

Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and

then visit the website at “http://activate.xmradio.com/” or

call “1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” with a major

credit card handy for signing up.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or set the component selector switch to

SOURCE and then press XM on the remote

control) to select “XM” as the input source.

The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in

the front panel display.

2 Check the XM Satellite Radio reception level

and adjust the orientation of the XM Connect-

and-Play digital antenna accessory for a

better percentage of the reception level.

You can display the XM Satellite Radio reception level by

using the “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION

MENU” (see page 87).

• If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel

display, the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna

accessory may not be connected to the XM jack on the

rear panel of this unit properly. See “Connecting the XM

Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory” on page 52

and check the connection.

• The “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION MENU”

(see page 87) cannot be adjusted by using the remote

control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of the

XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory

connected to the XM jack of this unit for a better

percentage of the reception level.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the

front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the

remote control) to select channel “0”.

You cannot select channel “0” if the All Channel Search

mode (see page 56) is not selected.

4 Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number

displayed in the front panel display and write

it down.

ID:_____________________________________

Activating XM Satellite Radio

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

LEVEL

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

AMP

SOURCE

Remote control

Front panel

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

XM RADIO

Lights up

Notes

Note

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

LEVEL

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Front panel

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

1 Set the component selector switch to

SOURCE and then press XM on the remote

control to select “XM” as the input source.

The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in

the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio

information (such as channel number, channel name,

category, artist name, or song title) for the currently

selected channel appears in the front panel display.

When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the

AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.

2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

See “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio search mode”

on page 56 for details.

• You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the

surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio

broadcasts in multi-channels (see page 42).

• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see

page 60).

• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the

front panel display or in the OSD (see page 61).

Basic XM Satellite Radio

operations

Note

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

STEREO

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-A UX DVR

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

(U.S.A. model)

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

[001] Preview

Lights up

AMP

SOURCE

Remote control

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

You can search for the desired channel using one of the

three search modes (All Channel Search, Category Search,

and Preset Search modes). You can also enter the channel

number directly to select the desired channel by using the

Direct Number Access mode (see page 59).

■ All Channel Search mode

1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or set the component selector switch to

SOURCE and then press XM on the remote

control) to select “XM” as the input source.

2 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or

SRCH MODE on the remote control)

repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”.

3 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or

A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control)

repeatedly to change the channel category.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the

front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the

remote control) repeatedly to search for a

channel within all channels.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and

holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel

(or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control).

Selecting the XM Satellite Radio

search mode

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING/CH

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

1234

LEVEL

(U.S.A. model)

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

STEREO

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-A UX DVR

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3-4

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

AMP

SOURCE

Remote control

Front panel

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

ALL CH SEARCH

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

Front panel Remote control

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Front panel Remote control

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

LEVEL

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Front panel

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Category Search mode

1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or set the component selector switch to

SOURCE and then press XM on the remote

control) to select “XM” as the input source.

2 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or

SRCH MODE on the remote control)

repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.

3 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or

A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control)

repeatedly to change the channel category.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the

front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the

remote control) repeatedly to search for a

channel within the selected channel

category.

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and

holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel

(or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control).

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING/CH

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

1234

LEVEL

(U.S.A. model)

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

STEREO

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-A UX DVR

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3-4

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

AMP

SOURCE

Remote control

Front panel

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

CAT SEARCH

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

Front panel Remote control

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Front panel

Remote control

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

LEVEL

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Front panel

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

■ Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For

details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset

channels” on page 60.

All preset channels (A1 to E8) recalls “001 Preview” by the initial

factory setting.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or set the component selector switch to

SOURCE and then press XM on the remote

control) to select “XM” as the input source.

2 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or

SRCH MODE on the remote control)

repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”.

3 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or

A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control)

repeatedly to change the preset channel

group (A to E).

4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the

front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the

remote control) repeatedly to change the

preset channel number (1 to 8).

You can also select the preset channel number directly by

pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control.

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING/CH

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

1234

LEVEL

(U.S.A. model)

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

STEREO

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-A UX DVR

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3-4

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

AMP

SOURCE

Remote control

Front panel

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

PRESET SEARCH

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

Front panel Remote control

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Front panel

Remote control

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

LEVEL

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Front panel

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Direct Number Access mode

1 Set the component selector switch to

SOURCE and then press XM on the remote

control to select “XM” as the input source.

2 Press SRCH MODE on the remote control

repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or

“CAT SEARCH”.

3 Press the numeric buttons on the remote

control to enter the desired three-digit

channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons as shown below.

The display changes as follows.

Press the numeric buttons and ENT. on the

remote control to enter the desired one-digit

or two-digit channel number.

For example, to enter the number 12, press the

numeric buttons as shown below.

• Instead of pressing ENT. to tune into the channel

immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit

confirms the entered channel number.

• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter

a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically

confirms the entered channel number.

• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons or ENT.

cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure.

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

STEREO

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-A UX DVR

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

(U.S.A. model)

AMP

SOURCE

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

ALL CH SEARCH

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

CAT SEARCH

STEREO

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

<XM> -12

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

<XM>123

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

<XM> --1

STEREO

MUSIC

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

ENT.

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite

Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in

each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall

any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel

group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”

on page 58.

1 Search for a channel you want to set as a

preset channel by using one of the XM

Satellite Radio search modes.

See “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio search mode”

on page 56 for details.

2 Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM

MEMORY on the remote control).

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 5 seconds.

You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while

the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel

display.

3 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or

A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control)

repeatedly to select a preset channel group

(A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The preset channel group letter appears in the front

panel display.

Setting the XM Satellite Radio

preset channels

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING/CH

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

3 2,54

LEVEL

(U.S.A. model)

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

2,5

3-4

(U.S.A. model)

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

[040] Deep Tra

Currently selected channel number

Note

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

RETURN

XM MEMORY

Flashes

Front panel Remote control

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

MEMORY

C [040] Deep

Currently selected preset channel group

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Front panel

Remote control

Flashes

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the

front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the

remote control) repeatedly to select a preset

channel number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

The preset channel number appears in the front panel

display.

5 Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM

MEMORY on the remote control) to set the

selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a

preset channel while the MEMORY indicator

is flashing.

A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number

for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns

off in the front panel display.

Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously

stored in the same preset channel group and number is

cleared.

You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such

as channel number, channel name, category, artist name,

or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front

panel display or in the OSD.

If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel

display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A.

model only)” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 104

for appropriate remedies.

■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display

Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the

remote control repeatedly to toggle between the

following XM Satellite Radio information display

modes.

Note

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

MEMORY

C5 [040] Deep

Currently selected preset channel number

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

LEVEL

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Front panel

Flashes

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

RETURN

XM MEMORY

Front panel

Remote control

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

C5:[040] Deep

Colon (:)

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information

Note

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING/CH

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

LEVEL

(U.S.A. model)

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

(U.S.A. model)

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

Channel number / name

Channel category

Artist name / Song title

Front panel

Remote control

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

When the channel number / name is displayed:

When the channel category is displayed:

When the artist name / song title is displayed:

• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric

characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM

Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a

continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by

using the “SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see

page 87).

• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that

cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be

displayed with an underscore “_”.

If you press DISPLAY while the XM Satellite Radio information

display is scrolling from right to left in the front panel display, the

XM Satellite Radio information display mode toggles as

described above.

■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information in the OSD

Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the

remote control.

The following screen is displayed in the OSD.

• You can select the amount of time while the XM Satellite Radio

information is displayed in the OSD by using the “XM

DISPLAY” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 87).

• To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press

ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in the

OSD.

• The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released

if you press ENTER on the remote control again or if you

change the XM Satellite Radio channel.

• This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information

screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM

Satellite Radio information screens, press TITLE on the remote

control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio

information screen is being on hold.

Note

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

[040] Deep Tra

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

<CAT>Rock

DVR DVD CD

V-AUX DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

TUNER

VOLUME

Coldplay / Clo

XM INFORMATION

ALL CH SEARCH

XM :040

CHAN :Deep Tracks

CAT :Rock

NAME :Coldplay

TITLE :Clocks

.( Coldplay / Clo )

[]/[]:CHANNEL

[<]/[>]:CATEGORY

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

DISPLAY

Front panel

Remote control

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and

shape of the room in which we are sitting.

■ Elements of a sound field

There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound

coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument.

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one

surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous

that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct

sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and

shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound

fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be

able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a

dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA

has done with the digital sound field processor.

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input

source (see page 37).

• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs

are applied.

■ Front panel operations

Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel.

The name of the selected sound field program appears in

the front panel display and in the OSD.

■ Remote control operations

Set the component selector switch to AMP and

then press one of the sound field program

selector buttons on the remote control

repeatedly.

The name of the selected sound field program appears in

the front panel display and in the OSD.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

Selecting sound field programs

Notes

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING/CH

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

LEVEL

(U.S.A. model)

PROGRAM selector

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

PRESET/CH

STEREO

EFFECT

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

(U.S.A. model)

AMP

Sound field program

selector buttons

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field

processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set “INPUT MODE”

to “AUTO” (see page 34) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.

• The DSP sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken

in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming

from the front, back, left and right.

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself.

■ For movie/video sources

You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”

can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel

stereo sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.

Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field

program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 63).

Sound field program descriptions

Notes

Remote

control

button

Sound field program Features Sources

STEREO

2ch Stereo

Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels or plays back 2-channel

sources as they are.

MULTI

2-CH

MUSIC

Pop/Rock

CINEMA DSP processing. Creates an enthusiastic atmosphere where you can

feel as if you are in an actual jazz or rock concert.

ENTERTAINMENT

TV Sports

CINEMA DSP processing. Reproduces the sound environment of a large concert

hall using the surround sound field to enhance your experience of watching

various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports

programs.

ENTERTAINMENT

Mono Movie

CINEMA DSP processing. Reproduces monaural video sources (such as old

movies) at the optimum reverberation level to create sound depth using only the

presence sound field.

ENTERTAINMENT

Game

CINEMA DSP processing. Adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game

sounds.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

■ For music sources

You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.

Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field

program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 63).

MOVIE THEATER

Spectacle

CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the extremely wide sound

field of a 70-mm movie theater in detail, making both the video and the sound

field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded in Dolby

Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS, especially large-scale movie productions.

MULTI

2-CH

MOVIE THEATER

Sci-Fi

CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces dialog and sound effects in

the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and

expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films

encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS in a virtual-space sound field

employing the most advanced techniques.

MOVIE THEATER

Adventure

CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound design of the

newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films similar to the sound field of

the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are

restrained as much as possible.

MOVIE THEATER

General

CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces sounds from 70-mm and

multi-channel soundtrack films characterized by soft and extensive sound field.

SUR. STANDARD

Standard processing for the selected decoder.

SUR. ENHANCED

Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.

Remote

control

button

Sound field program Features Sources

Remote

control

button

Sound field program Features Sources

STEREO

2ch Stereo

Plays back 2-channel sources.

2-CH

STEREO

6ch Stereo

Plays back 2-channel sources from all speakers in 6.1 channels, providing a

larger sound field ideal for background music at parties, etc.

MUSIC

Hall in Vienna

HiFi DSP processing. The program reproduces a classic shoe-box type concert

hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely

complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound.

MULTI

2-CH

MUSIC

The Bttm Line

HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the stage front in “The Bottom

Line”, a famous New York jazz club where 300 people can be seated.

MUSIC

The Roxy Thtr

HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the dynamic rock music

environment of “The Roxy Theatre”, one of the hottest rock clubs in L.A.The

listener’s imaginary seat is at the center-left of the hall.

ENTERTAINMENT

Disco

HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the acoustic environment of a

lively disco in the heart of a big city to create a highly concentrated and

energetic sound.

SUR. STANDARD

Standard processing for the selected decoder.

SUR. ENHANCED

Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory

settings. Although you do not have to change the initial

factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to

better suit the input source or your listening room.

• Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to

initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a

sound field program group (see page 86).

• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the

initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the

sound field parameter name in the OSD.

• You cannot change the sound field parameter values when

“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON”

(see page 86). If you want to change the sound field parameter

values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.

• For details about the function and control range of each sound

field parameter, see page 67.

• Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field

program parameter settings.

• The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field

programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.

In this case, press u / d to scroll through pages.

• If you press and hold j / i to change the sound field parameter

value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the

front panel display.

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP.

2 Turn on the video monitor and then press

DISPLAY on the remote control.

The following display is shown in the OSD.

3 Press one of the sound field program

selector buttons repeatedly to select the

desired sound field program you want to

adjust.

4 Press u / d to select the desired sound field

parameter and then j / i to change the

selected sound field parameter value.

•Press i to increase the value.

•Press j to decrease the value.

Changing sound field parameter

settings

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X D VR

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDI O

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

(U.S.A. model)

AMP

SOURCE

DISPLAY

P02 MUSIC

. Pop/Rock

DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB

P.INIT.DLY;;21ms

P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0

S.INIT.DLY;;25ms

S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0

Sound field program category

Sound field parameters Sound field parameter

values

Cursor

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

■ Sound field parameter descriptions

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 66 for details.

Sound field parameter Features

DSP LEVEL

DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on

the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level

relative to the level of the direct sound.

Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB

INIT.DLY

P.INIT.DLY

S.INIT.DLY

SB INI.DLY

Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delay. Changes the apparent distance

from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection

heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The

larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set

to a large value.

Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)

1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY)

Source sound

Early

reflections

Time

Delay

Sound source

Reflection face

Level

Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms

Level

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

ROOM SIZE

P.ROOM SIZE

S.ROOM SIZE

SB ROOM SIZE

Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the

surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the

sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between

the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the

reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter

from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

LIVENESS

S.LIVENESS

SB LIVENESS

Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the

hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound

source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which

has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as

“dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets

you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.

Control range: 0 to 10

Sound field parameter Features

Level

Time Time Time

Source sound

Early

reflections

Small value = 0.1

Large value = 2.0

Sound source

Source sound

Level

Dead

Live

Time

Time Time

Small reflected

sound

Large reflected

sound

Small value = 0 Large value = 10

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

REV.TIME

Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation

sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment

over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening

room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.

Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s

REV.DELAY

Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and

the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound

begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Control range: 0 to 250 ms

Sound field parameter Features

Reverberation

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

Source sound

REV.TIME

Sound source

Short

reverberation

Long

reverberation

Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s

Early reflections

Source sound

Level

REV. LEVEL

Time

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

REV.LEVEL

Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the

stronger the reverberation becomes.

Control range: 0 to 100%

2ch Stereo

DIRECT

2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi

stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• The “AUTO” setting bypasses the decoders and DSP processors only when “BASS” and

“TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 32).

• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2

channels and output from the front left and right speakers.

• The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the

subwoofer in the following cases:

– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 79).

– “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 78) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR”

(see page 79).

6ch Stereo

CT LEVEL

SL LEVEL

SR LEVEL

SB LEVEL

6-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right and surround back levels. Adjusts the

volume level of each channel in the 6-channel stereo mode.

Control range: 0 to 100%

Sound field parameter Features

(dB)

60 dB

Level

Source sound

Reverberation

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

Time

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

The “PRO LOGIC IIx Music”, “PRO LOGIC II Music”, and “DTS Neo:6 Music” parameters can be set only when “SUR.

STANDARD” is selected. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to

select “SUR. STANDARD” (see page 42).

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

PRO LOGIC II Music

PANORAMA

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround

speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF, ON

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

PRO LOGIC II Music

DIMENSION

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards

the front or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)

Initial setting: STD (standard)

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

PRO LOGIC II Music

CENTER WIDTH

Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output

completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value

moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to

7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)

Initial setting: 3

DTS Neo:6 Music

C.IMAGE

DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the

center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.

Control range: 0.0 to 1.0

Initial setting: 0.3

Sound field parameter Features

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the table

below to understand the speaker layout for each sound field program.

Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back.

Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as

special sound effects, etc.

Except for “2ch Stereo”, “6ch Stereo”, and “STRAIGHT”, you can select a decoder to output sound from the surround back speaker

(see page 41).

The abbreviations and symbols used in each diagram are as follows:

When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are turned off in the front panel display

Sound field program speaker layouts

Note

Front left speaker Surround left speaker

Center speaker Surround right speaker

Front right speaker Surround back speaker

Speaker from which sound is being output Speaker from which no sound is being output

Sound field program

2-channel audio

(monaural)

2-channel audio

(stereo)

5.1/6.1-channel audio *

STEREO

2ch Stereo

STEREO

6ch Stereo

MUSIC

Hall in Vienna

The Bttm Line

The Roxy Thtr

ENTERTAINMENT

Disco

MUSIC

Pop/Rock

ENTERTAINMENT

TV Sports

Mono Movie

Game

C SR

SL SR

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

MOVIE THEATER

Spectacle

Sci-Fi

Adventure

General

SUR. STANDARD

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DTS

Pro Logic Pro Logic

SUR. STANDARD

PLII Movie

PLII Music

PLII Game

PLIIx Movie

PLIIx Music

PLIIx Game

Pro Logic II/Pro Logic IIx Pro Logic II

Pro Logic IIx

SUR. STANDARD

Neo:6 Cinema

Neo:6 Music

Cinema Cinema/Music

Music

SUR. STANDARD

Neural Sur.

Sound field program

2-channel audio

(monaural)

2-channel audio

(stereo)

5.1/6.1-channel audio *

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

SUR. ENHANCED

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DTS

Pro Logic Pro Logic

SUR. ENHANCED

PLII Movie

PLIIx Movie

Pro Logic II

Pro Logic IIx

SUR. ENHANCED

Neo:6 Cinema

STRAIGHT

Monaural playback

DIRECT STEREO

Monaural playback

Sound field program

2-channel audio

(monaural)

2-channel audio

(stereo)

5.1/6.1-channel audio *

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this

unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening

environment.

■ Basic setup BASIC SETUP

Use this feature to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort (see page 28).

■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP

Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.

Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU

Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or

compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.

Input menu 2 INPUT MENU

Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.

SET MENU

Parameter Features Page

A)SPEAKER SET

Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the

crossover frequency.

B)SPEAKER LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of each speaker.

C)SP DISTANCE

Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.

D)CENTER GEQ

Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.

E)LFE LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

G)AUDIO SET

Adjusts the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings.

Parameter Features Page

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.

B)INPUT MODE

Selects the initial input mode of the source.

C)INPUT RENAME

Changes the name of the input source.

D)VOLUME TRIM

Adjusts the output volume of each jack.

SET MENU

Option menu 3 OPTION MENU

Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.

The “XM RADIO SET” parameter is only applicable to the U.S.A. model.

■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO

Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 39).

Parameter Features Page

A)DISPLAY SET

Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals.

B)MEMORY GUARD

Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings.

C)PARAM. INI

Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.

D)MULTI ZONE SET

Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

E)XM RADIO SET

Displays the current reception level of the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory or

adjusts the XM Satellite Radio information display settings.

Note

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

• You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is

reproducing sound.

• If you press one of the sound field program selector buttons

during the “SET MENU” operation, the “SET MENU”

operation is canceled.

• Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each

parameter setting.

• Press RETURN to return to the previous menu level.

You cannot change some “SET MENU” parameters when

“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected as the night

listening mode (see page 33).

1 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press SET MENU to enter “SET

MENU”.

The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.

2 Press u / d to select “MANUAL SETUP”.

3 Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.

The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the

OSD.

4 Press u / d repeatedly and then press

ENTER to select and enter the desired menu.

The following displays are examples where “SOUND

MENU” is selected.

Using SET MENU

Note

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

STEREO

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-A UX DVR

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

2-6

1,7

(U.S.A. model)

SET MENU

SRCH MODE



SET MENU

.;BASICSETUP

;MANUALSETUP

.;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

AMP

SOURCE



SET MENU

;BASICSETUP

.;MANUALSETUP

.;SIGNAL INFO

[ ]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

;MANUAL SETUP

.1SOUNDMENU

2INPUTMENU

3OPTIONMENU

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

.A)SPEAKERSET

B)SPEAKERLEVEL

C)SPDISTANCE

D)CENTER GEQ

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

1 SOUND

MENU 1/2

.E)LFE LEVEL

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

G)AUDIO SET



[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

1 SOUND

MENU 2/2

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

5 Press u / d repeatedly and then press

ENTER to select and enter the desired

submenu.

The following display is an example where

“SPEAKER LEVEL” is selected.

6 Press u / d to select the desired parameter

and then j / i to change the parameter

settings.

• Press i to increase the value.

• Press j to decrease the value.

7 Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.

Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or

compensate for video signal processing delays when using

LCD monitors or projectors.

■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET

Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.

If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,

you can change these settings according to your preference.

Front speakers FRONT SP

Choices: SMALL, LARGE

• Select “SMALL” (small) if you have small front

speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals

effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left

and right channels are directed to the speakers selected

in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 79).

• Select “LARGE” (large) if you have large front

speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals

effectively. All the front left and right channel signals

are directed to the front left and right speakers.

If “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 79), the LFE

signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the low-frequency

signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency

signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to

“NONE” are all directed to the front left and right speakers

regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, the stored data will be lost in case the power

cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the

power supply is cut off for more than one week.



.FL;;;;;;;;;;

FR;;;;;;;;;;

 C;;;;;;;;;;

B)SPEAKER

LEVEL

-__________+

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

1 SOUND MENU

Note

.A)SPEAKERSET

B)SPEAKERLEVEL

C)SPDISTANCE

D)CENTER GEQ

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

1 SOUND

MENU 1/2

.E)LFE LEVEL

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

G)AUDIO SET



[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

1 SOUND

MENU 2/2

  SMALL>LARGE

FRONT SP

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Center speaker CENTER SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a center

speaker. The low-frequency signals of the center

channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/

BASS OUT”, and the rest of the center channel signals

are directed to the front left and right speakers.

• Select “SML” (small) if you have a small center

speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals

effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center

channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/

BASS OUT”.

• Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large center speaker

that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All

the center channel signals are directed to the center

speaker.

Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround

speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP

mode (see page 43) and “SUR. B SP” is automatically

set to “NONE”. The low-frequency signals of the

surround left and right channels are directed to the

speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.

• Select “SML” (small) if you have small surround left

and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the

surround left and right channels are directed to the

speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.

• Select “LRG” (large) if you have large surround left

and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are

directed to the surround left and right speakers.

Surround back speakers SUR. B SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a

surround back speaker. The low-frequency signals of

the surround back channel are directed to the speakers

selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”, and the rest of the

surround back channel signals are directed to the

surround left and right speakers.

• Select “SML” (small) if you have a small surround

back speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the

surround back channel are directed to the speakers

selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.

• Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large surround back

speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals

effectively. All the surround back channel signals are

directed to the surround back speaker.

Bass out LFE/BASS OUT

Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE

(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.

Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH

• Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a

subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-

frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or

“SMALL”) or to “NONE” are directed to the

subwoofer.

• Select “FRNT” (front) if you did not connect a

subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals

of the front left and right channels, and the low-

frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or

“SMALL”) or to “NONE” are all directed to the front

left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP”

setting (see page 78).

• Select “BOTH” (both) if you connected a subwoofer.

The low-frequency signals of any source are output

from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the

low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML”

(or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” are directed to the

subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front left

and right channels are directed to the front left and

right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the

“FRONT SP” setting (see page 78).

NONE>SMLLRG

CENTER SP

NONE>SMLLRG

SUR. L/R SP

 NONE>SML LRG

SUR. B SP

SWFRFRNT>BOTH

LFE/BASS OUT

SET MENU

Crossover CROSS OVER

Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the

speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in

“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 78 and 79). All frequencies

below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer

or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in

“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 78 and 79).

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE

Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if

bass sounds are lacking or unclear.

Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE

• Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the

phase of your subwoofer.

• Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your

subwoofer.

■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL

Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels

between the front left or surround left speakers and each

speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 78).

Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB

Control step: 1.0 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

• Select “FL” to adjust the balance of the front left

speaker.

• Select “FR” to adjust the balance of the front right

speaker.

• Select “C” to adjust the balance of the center speaker.

• Select “SL” to adjust the balance of the surround left

speaker.

• Select “SR” to adjust the balance of the surround right

speaker.

• Select “SB” to adjust the balance of the surround back

speaker.

• Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer.

“C”, “SL”, “SR”, “SB” and “SWFR” cannot be adjusted if

“CENTER SP” (see page 79), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 79),

“SUR. B SP” (see page 79) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 79)

are set to “NONE” respectively.

FREQ;;;80Hz

CROSS OVER

>NORMALREVERSE

02ASUBWOOFER PHASE

Note



.FL;;;;;;;;;;

FR;;;;;;;;;;

 C;;;;;;;;;;

B)SPEAKER

LEVEL

-__________+

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each

speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same

time.

Unit UNIT

Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)

Initial setting:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)

[Other models]: meters (m)

• Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.

• Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.

Speaker distances

Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)

Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)

• Select “FRONT L” to adjust the distance of the front

left speaker.

Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

• Select “FRONT R” to adjust the distance of the front

right speaker.

Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

• Select “CENTER” to adjust the distance of the center

speaker.

Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

• Select “SUR. L” to adjust the distance of the surround

left speaker.

Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

• Select “SUR. R” to adjust the distance of the surround

right speaker.

Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

• Select “SUR. B” to adjust the distance of the surround

back speaker.

Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)

• Select “SWFR” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer.

Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

“CENTER”, “SUR.L”, “SUR.R”, “SUR.B” and “SWFR” cannot

be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 79), “SUR. L/R SP” (see

page 79), “SUR. B SP” (see page 79) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see

page 79) are set to “NONE” respectively.

■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ

Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band

(100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic

equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of

the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You

can make adjustments while listening to the currently

selected source component or a test tone.

Control range: –6 to +6 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

Test tone TEST

Choices: OFF, ON

• Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently

selected source component.

• Select “ON” to output test tones from the front left and

center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the

center speaker.

Press u / d to select a frequency band and j / i to adjust the

selected frequency band.

■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of

your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries

low-frequency special effects which are only added to

certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Control range: –20 to 0 dB

Control step: 1 dB

Speaker SPEAKER

Adjusts the speaker LFE level.

Headphone HEADPHONE

Adjusts the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 79),

some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT

jack.

Note

. UNIT;;;;;;;;feet

FRONTL;;;10.0ft

FRONTR;;;10.0ft

CENTER;;;;10.0ft

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

C)SP

DISTANCE

Note

.TEST>OFFON



100Hz ;;;;;; 0dB

300Hz ;;;;;; 0dB

1kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

3kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

10kHz ;;;;;; 0dB

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

D)CENTER GEQ

-______+

.SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;;;0dB

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

E)LFE

LEVEL

SET MENU

■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE

Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range

compression to be applied to your speakers or

headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is

decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.

Speaker SP

Adjusts the speaker compression.

Headphone HP

Adjusts the headphone compression.

Choices: MIN, STD, MAX

• Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low

volume levels.

• Select “STD” (standard) for general use.

• Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest

amount of dynamic range.

■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET

Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this

unit.

Muting type MUTING TYPE

Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function

reduces the output volume (see page 33).

Choices: FULL, –20dB

• Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio

output.

• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.

Audio delay AUDIO DELAY

Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize

it with the video image. This may be necessary when

using certain LCD monitors or projectors.

Control range: 0 to 160 ms

Control step: 1 ms

Tone bypass TONE BYPASS

Use this feature to select whether audio output bypasses

tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are

set to 0 dB (see page 32).

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select “AUTO” if you want signals to bypass tone

control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible.

• Select “OFF” if you do not want signals to bypass tone

control circuitry.

.SP:MINSTD>MAX

HP:MINSTD>MAX

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

.MUTING TYPE;FULL

AUDIO DELAY;;0ms

TONE BYPASS;AUTO

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

G)AUDIO SET

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the

input mode or rename the input source.

■ Input/output assignment

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according

to the component to be used if the initial settings of this

unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the

following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and

effectively connect more components.

Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select

the corresponding component by using the INPUT

selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on

the remote control).

For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C

CMPNT-V INPUT [A]

CMPNT-V INPUT [B]

CMPNT-V INPUT [C]

Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR

[B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR

[C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR

For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 OPTICAL OUT (1)

Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,

DVR

For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4

OPTICAL IN (2)

OPTICAL IN (3)

OPTICAL IN (4)

Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,

DVR

(3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,

DVR

(4) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,

DVR

For COAXIAL INPUT jack 5 COAXIAL IN (5)

Choices: (5) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,

DVR

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT

(COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority

is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT

(COAXIAL) jack.

2 INPUT MENU

.A)I/OASSIGNMENT

B)INPUTMODE

C)INPUTRENAME

D)VOLUME TRIM

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter





INPUT



.[A];;;;;DVD

(DVD)

[B];;;;;DTV/CBL

(DTV/CBL)

[C];;;;; DVR

( DVR )



CMPNT-V



INPUT

.(1);;;;;MD/CD-R

(MD/CD-R )



OPTICAL



OUT

Notes

.(2);;;;;MD/CD-R

(MD/CD-R)

(3);;;;; DVD

(DVD )

(4);;;;;DTV/CBL

(DTV/CBL )



OPTICAL



.(5);;;;; DVD

( DVD )



COAXIAL



SET MENU

■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE

Use this feature to set this unit to reset “INPUT MODE”

back to “AUTO” (see page 34) regardless of the previous

setting or to recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”,

or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on

this unit.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select “AUTO” to reset “INPUT MODE” back to

“AUTO” (see page 34) regardless of the previous

setting whenever you turn on this unit. This unit

automatically selects input signals in the following

order:

(1) Digital signals

(2) Analog signals

• Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically recall

the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”, or “ANALOG”)

used for that source whenever you turn on this unit.

■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the input source

that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.

1 Press one of the input selector buttons on

the remote control to select the input source

you want to change the name of.

2 Set the component selector switch to AMP

and then press j / i on the remote control to

place the “_” (underscore) under the space

or the character you want to edit.

3 Press u / d to select the character you want

to use and then press j / i to move to the

next space.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

• Press d to change the character in the following order, or

press u to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#,

*, –, +, etc.)

4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each

input source.

5 Press SET MENU on the remote control to

exit from “INPUT RENAME”.

>AUTOLAST

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return



B)INPUT



MODE

DVD-> DVD

[<]/[>]:Position

[]/[]:Chara.



C)INPUT



RENAME

________

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X DV R

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Volume Trim D)VOLUME TRIM

Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at

each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of

each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume

when switching between input sources.

Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/CBL,

V-AUX, DVR

Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB

Control step: 1.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.

■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET

Dimmer DIMMER

Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel

display.

Control range: – 4 to 0

Control step: 1

• Press j to make the front panel display dimmer.

• Press i to make the front panel display brighter.

Video conversion VIDEO CONV.

Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals

input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” to convert composite and S-video signals

interchangeably and up-convert composite and S-video

signals to component video signals.

• Select “OFF” not to convert any signals.

• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR

OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the

same type of video connections between each component.

• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are

converted to component video signals, the picture quality may

suffer depending on your VCR.

• You must set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” to display the OSD.

• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video

jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such

cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.



DVD->0.0dB

[<]/[>]:Adjust

[RETURN]:Exit



D)VOLUME TRIM

3 OPTION MENU

Notes

.A)DISPLAYSET

B)MEMORYGUARD

C)PARAM.INI

D)MULTI ZONESET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter





OPTION



MENU 1/2

.E)XM RADIO SET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter





OPTION



MENU 2/2

.DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0

VIDEOCONV.;;;ON

OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0

GRAY BACK;;;AUTO



[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust



A)DISPLAY



SET

SET MENU

OSD shift OSD SHIFT

Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.

Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward)

Control step: 1

Initial setting: 0

• Press j to raise the position of the OSD.

• Press i to lower the position of the OSD.

Gray back GRAY BACK

Use this feature to display a gray background in the OSD

when there is no video signal being input.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select “AUTO” to display a gray background in the

OSD when there is no video signal being input.

• Select “OFF” not to display any background in the

OSD.

• Depending on the video signals being input or the system

setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be

displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to

“OFF”.

• Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not

be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the

picture.

■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other system settings.

Choices: OFF, ON

• Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD”

feature.

• Select “ON” to protect:

– DSP program parameters

– all “SET MENU” items

– all speaker levels

When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select

and adjust any other “SET MENU” items.

■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI

Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound

field program within a sound field program group. When

you initialize a sound field program group, all of the

parameter values within that group revert to their initial

factory settings.

Press the corresponding sound field program selector

buttons on the remote control to select the sound

field

program that you want to initialize.

An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field

program names that have been changed from their initial

factory settings.

Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT,

MOVIE THEATER, STANDARD

• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter

settings once you initialize a sound field program group.

• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field

programs.

• You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when

“MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON” (see page 86).

Notes

Note

>OFFON

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return



B)MEMORY



GUARD

Notes

STEREO

*MUSIC

ENTERTAINMENT

MOVIE THEATER

*STANDARD

Press DSP key



C)PARAM.



INI

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Zone set D)MULTI ZONE SET

Use this feature to specify the location of speakers

connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals of this unit.

Speaker B setting SP B

Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers

connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

Choices: FRONT, ZONE B

• Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B

when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B

terminals are set in the main zone.

• Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another zone. If

SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is

turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in

the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at

the SPEAKERS B terminals only.

• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the

sound is output from both headphones and the SPEAKERS B

terminals when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”.

• If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”,

this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode

(see page 43).

■ XM Radio setting E)XM RADIO SET

(U.S.A. model only)

XM Radio information display time XM DISPLAY

Use this feature to set the time to display the XM Satellite

Radio information in the OSD after pressing DISPLAY on

the front panel or on the remote control.

Choices: ON, 10S, 30S, OFF

• Select “ON” to display the XM Satellite Radio

information while this unit is tuned into a channel.

• Select “10S” to display the XM Satellite Radio

information for 10 seconds.

• Select “30S” to display the XM Satellite Radio

information for 30 seconds.

• Select “OFF” not to display the XM Satellite Radio

information.

XM Radio antenna XM ANTENNA

Use this feature to check the current reception level of the

XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory

connected to the XM jack of this unit (see page 52). For

the best reception, orient the XM Connect-and-Play digital

antenna accessory so that a value of 60% or more is

displayed here.

Display status: NONE, 0 to 100%

•

“

NONE

” is displayed if the

XM Connect-and-Play

digital antenna

accessory is not connected to this unit. In this case, check the

antenna connections (see page 52).

• The “XM ANTENNA” parameter cannot be adjusted by using

the remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of

the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory connected

to the XM jack of this unit for a better percentage of the

reception level.

XM Radio information display scroll SCROLL

Use this feature to set whether to display the XM Satellite

Radio information in the front panel display in a

continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at

once (see page 61).

Choices: CONT, ONCE

• Select “CONT” to display the XM Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display in a continuous

manner.

• Select “ONCE” to display the XM Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display by 14

alphanumeric characters at once.

Notes

.SPB;;;;;;;FRONT



[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return



D)MULTI ZONE



SET

Notes

E)XM RADIO SET

.XM DISPLAY;;;10S

XM ANTENNA;;NONE

SCROLL;;;;;;CONT

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

ADVANCED SETUP

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional

operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each

parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.

• The settings you make are reflected next time you press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see

page 27).

• Only MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup

menu.

• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.

• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.

1 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to turn

off this unit.

2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the

front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF

inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front

panel to select the parameter you want to

adjust.

The name of the selected parameter appears in the

front panel display.

See page 89 for a complete list of available

parameters.

4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front

panel repeatedly to change the selected

parameter setting.

5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to save

the new setting and turn off this unit.

The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on

this unit.

ADVANCED SETUP

Notes

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

1-2,5 2,4 3

LEVEL

(U.S.A. model)

MASTER

ON OFF

MASTER

ON OFF

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

While holding

down

PROGRAM

SP IMP.-8 MIN

Currently selected

parameter setting

Currently selected

parameter

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

ON OFF

ADVANCED SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.

Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit

so that it matches that of your speakers.

Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN

• Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω .

• Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .

The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems

(A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8ΩMIN”.

■ Factory presets PRESET

Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to

the initial factory settings (see page 100).

Choices: CANCEL, RESET

• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this

unit.

• Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.

• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit

including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the

advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized.

• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on

this unit.

■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP

Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote

control recognition (see page 93).

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library

code is set to “00001”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library

code is set to “00002”.

You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library

code for the remote control (see page 93).

■ Remote control TUNER ID REMOTE TUN

Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for

remote control recognition (see page 93).

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID

library code is set to “81916”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID

library code is set to “81917”.

You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library

code for the remote control (see page 93).

■ Remote control XM ID REMOTE XM

(U.S.A. model only)

Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote

control recognition (see page 94).

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID library

code is set to “81918”.

• Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID library

code is set to “81919”.

You need to set the corresponding remote control XM library

code for the remote control (see page 93).

■ Tuner frequency step TU

(Asia and General models only)

Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according

to the frequency spacing in your area.

Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50

• Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South

America.

• Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas.

SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level

8ΩMIN

Front

If you use one set (A or B),

the impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

If you use two sets (A and

B), the impedance of each

speaker must be 16 Ω or

higher.

Center

The impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

Surround

Surround back

6ΩMIN

Front

If you use one set (A or B),

the impedance of each

speaker must be 4 Ω or

higher.

If you use two sets (A and

B), the impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

Center

The impedance of each

speaker must be 6 Ω or

higher.

Surround

Surround back

Notes

Note

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA

and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set the appropriate remote control code for

each input source (see page 92).

■ Controlling this unit

Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this

unit.

These buttons always control this unit regardless of the

component selector switch position.

These buttons control this unit only when the component

selector switch is set to AMP.

■ Controlling a TV

Set the component selector switch to TV to control your

TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate

remote control code for DTV/CBL or (see page 92).

When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/

CBL and , priority is given to the one set for DTV/

CBL.

These buttons always control your TV regardless of the

component selector switch position.

These buttons control your TV only when the component

selector switch is set to TV. For details, see the “Digital TV/

Cable TV” column on page 91.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components

Notes

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

DISC SKIP

STEREO

EFFECT

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X DV R

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

(U.S.A. model)

Notes

Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV

TV POWER Turns on or off the power.

TV VOL +/–

Increases or decreases the volume

level.

TV CH +/– Changes the channel number.

TV MUTE Mutes the audio output.

TV INPUT Changes the input source.

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

DISC SKIP

STEREO

EFFECT

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X DV R

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

(U.S.A. model)

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Controlling other components

Set the component selector switch to SOURCE to control

other components selected with the input selector buttons,

, or . You must set the appropriate remote control

code for each input source (see page 92). The following

table shows the function of each control button used to

control other components assigned to each input selector

button, , and . Be advised that some buttons may not

correctly operate the selected component.

This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.

These buttons control your VCR or DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 92).

When you use this button to record a source, press it twice repeatedly to prevent a malfunction.

Press and hold to search backward or forward.

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

AMP

SOURCE

STEREO

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

POWER

POWERPOWER

AVTV

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-A UX DV R

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

DISPLAYRETURN

BAND

SRCH MODE

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

DISC SKIP

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

(U.S.A. model)

Remote

control

DVD

player/

recorder

VCR

Digital TV/

Cable TV

LD player CD player

MD/CD

recorder

Tuner

iPod

1 AV POWER

Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1

2 1-9, 0, +10

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Numeric

buttons

Preset stations

(1-8)

3 TITLE

Title Band

4 PRESET/CH

VCR channel

Up Preset up (1-8) Up

PRESET/CH

Down

VCR channel

down

Down

Preset down

(1-8)

Down

A-E/CAT. j Left Left

Preset down

(A-E)

A-E/CAT. i Right Right

Preset up

(A-E)

ENTER Enter Enter

Subsequent

5 RETURN

Return Return

6 REC/

DISC SKIP

Disc skip

(player)

Rec (recorder)

Rec *3 Rec *2*3 Disc skip Rec *3

p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play Play

backward

backward *2

backward

backward *4

f Search forward Search forward

Search forward

Search forward Search forward Search forward

Search forward

AUDIO Audio Audio Audio *2 Sound

e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause Pause

b Skip backward Skip backward

Skip backward

Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward

a Skip forward Skip forward

Skip forward

Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward

s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop Stop

7 ENT.

Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index

8 MENU

Menu Menu Previous menu

9 DISPLAY

Display Display Display Display Display Display Display

Notes

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

You can control your TV and other components by setting

the appropriate remote control code for each input source.

For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer

to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of

this manual.

The following table shows the default component in the

“Library (component category)” column and the remote

control code for each input source.

Remote Control Code Default Settings

You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even

if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above.

In this case, try setting other YAMAHA remote control codes.

1 Press one of the input selector buttons or

/ to select the component you want to

set up.

2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

3 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter

the five-digit remote control code for the

component to be used.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice, and the remote control code for the

selected component is set.

Refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the

end of this manual.

• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one

code, try each of them until you find the correct one.

• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step

3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the

setup procedure.

• If you enter the code number “9980”, the remote control

code previously set for the selected component is cleared.

Setting the remote control code

Input

source

Library

(component

category)

Manufacturer

Default

code

CD CD YAMAHA 61907

MD/CD-R MD YAMAHA 70888

XM TUNER YAMAHA 81918

DVD DVD YAMAHA 40539

DTV/CBL – – –

TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 81916

V-AUX – – –

DVR DVR YAMAHA 51544

–––

Note

Notes

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X DV R

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

Flashes

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

TRANSMIT

Flashes

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can operate multiple YAMAHA receivers or

amplifiers in the same room with the supplied remote

control simultaneously. Set the appropriate library code to

select and operate the desired component with the

supplied remote control.

■ Setting remote control AMP ID library

codes

Select one of the following codes to set the remote control

AMP ID library code for the component you want to use.

1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code

number “00001” or “00002”.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice, and the AMP ID library code is

changed.

The remote control setting

The setting of this unit (see page 89)

• You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID

of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 89).

• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you

may be able to operate the other components

simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,

set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit

separately.

■ Setting remote control TUNER ID library

codes

Select one of the following codes to set the remote control

TUNER ID library code for the component you want to

use.

1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code

number “81916” or “81917”.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice, and the TUNER ID library code is

changed.

The remote control setting

The setting of this unit (see page 89)

• You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER

ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 89).

• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you

may be able to operate the other components

simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,

set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit

separately.

Setting library codes

AMP ID

library code

Function

Remote

control AMP

ID *2

00001

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using

the default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

00002

To operate this unit using

an alternative code.

ID2

Notes

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

Flashes

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

TRANSMIT

Flashes

TUNER ID

library code

Function

Remote

control

TUNER ID *2

81916

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using

the default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

81917

To operate this unit using

an alternative code.

ID2

Notes

TUNER

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

Flashes

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

TRANSMIT

Flashes

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Setting remote control XM ID library

codes (U.S.A. model only)

Select one of the following codes to set the remote control

XM ID library code for the component you want to use.

1 Press XM to select “XM” as the input source.

2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code

number “81918” or “81919”.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice, and the XM ID library code is changed.

The remote control setting

The setting of this unit (see page 89)

• You need to set the corresponding remote control XM ID

of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 89).

• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you

may be able to operate the other components

simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,

set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit

separately.

Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes

previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory

settings.

1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code

number “9981”.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice, and all the remote control codes

previously set are cleared and reset to the initial

factory settings.

If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step

2, the clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the

clearing procedure.

XM ID

library code

Function

Remote

control XM

ID *2

81918

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using

the default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

81919

To operate this unit using

an alternative code.

ID2

Notes

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

Flashes

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

TRANSMIT

Flashes

Resetting all remote control codes

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

Flashes

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

TRANSMIT

Flashes

USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone 2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce

separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone 2). You can control this unit from the second zone

using the supplied remote control.

You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:

• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone.

• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the

infrared signal receiver in the second zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone.

• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone.

• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with

your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements.

• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need

to use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected as shown below.

■ Multi-zone configuration and Zone 2 connections

• When you do not use the main zone, press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel to turn off the main zone. Adjust the volume

control on the amplifier in the second zone.

• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.

USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION

Only analog signals are sent to the second zone. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone must be

connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.

Connecting Zone 2

Notes

REMOTE OUTREMOTE OUTREMOTE OUT REMOTE OUT

REMOTE INREMOTE INREMOTE IN

REMOTE IN

This unit

YAMAHA

component

YAMAHA

component

Infrared signal

receiver

REMOTE OUT

AUDIO IN

VIDEO IN

MONITOR OUT

SP OUT

REMOTE IN

ZONE 2 OUTPUT

MAIN ZONE

ZONE 2

Infrared signal emitter

DVD player

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal receiver

Second zoneMain zone

This unit

USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION

You can select and control Zone 2 by using the control

buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The

available operations are listed as follows:

• Selecting the input source of Zone 2

• Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as

the input source of Zone 2 (see page 45)

• Tuning into XM Satellite Radio when “XM” is selected

as the input source of Zone 2 (see page 52) (U.S.A.

model only)

• Enjoying music stored on your iPod stationed in a

YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold

separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this

unit when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source

(see page 98)

The volume level and tonal quality of Zone 2 cannot be adjusted.

Adjust the volume control on the amplifier in Zone 2.

You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is

flashing in the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone 2 mode is

automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal

operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone 2 selection

procedure.

■ Controlling Zone 2 with the front panel

1 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF to turn on Zone 2.

ZONE 2 ON/OFF is operational only when MASTER ON/

OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

Once MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed

inward to the ON position, you can also press POWER or

STANDBY on the remote control to turn on the main zone

and Zone 2 or set them to the standby mode.

2 Press ZONE CONTROL to control Zone 2.

The ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 5 seconds.

3 Rotate the INPUT selector to select the

desired input source while the ZONE2

indicator is flashing in the front panel

display.

• Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the

TUNER features in Zone 2. For details about the

TUNER operations, see “FM/AM TUNING” on

page 45.

• Select “XM” as the input source to use the XM

Satellite Radio features in Zone 2. For details about

the XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM®

SATELLITE RADIO TUNING” on page 52.

• Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use iPod

features in Zone 2. For details about the iPod

operations, see “USING iPod®” on page 98.

4 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF to set Zone 2 to the

standby mode.

Controlling Zone 2

Note

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

ZONE2

Flashes

INPUT

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Setting the remote control to the Zone 2

mode

The remote control is originally set to the main mode to control

the main zone. To control Zone 2 with the remote control, you

must first set the remote control to the Zone 2 mode.

1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code

number “9992”.

■ Controlling Zone 2 with the remote

control

• The remote control is originally set to the main mode to control

the main zone, and the TRANSMIT indicator on the remote

control is turned off when the remote control is set to the main

mode.

• When the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode, POWER,

STANDBY, MUTE, and the input selector buttons are set to

control Zone 2. However, the rest of the remote control buttons

remain in the main mode.

• The remote control automatically exits from the Zone 2 mode in

the following cases:

– when you do not make any operations within 10 seconds after

the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode.

– when you press a remote control button other than POWER,

STANDBY, MUTE, and the input selector buttons.

1 Press and hold POWER or STANDBY and

then press to set the remote control to

the Zone 2 mode.

• Press POWER when the main zone is turned on.

• Press STANDBY when the main zone is turned off.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

lights up while the remote control is set to the Zone 2

mode.

2 Press POWER to turn on Zone 2.

3 Press one of the input selector buttons to

select the desired input source of Zone 2.

To mute the audio output of Zone 2, press MUTE on the

remote control. Press MUTE again to resume the audio

output of Zone 2.

4 Press STANDBY to set Zone 2 to the standby

mode.

Note

Notes

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

Flashes

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

TRANSMIT

Flashes

TRANSMIT

POWER

Lights up

While holding

down

STANDBY

POWER

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CD-R XM

DVD DTV

CBL

TUNER

V-AU X DV R

MUTE

STANDBY

USING IPOD®

Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 22), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.

You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression

artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 36).

• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.

• Compatibility with your iPod may vary depending on the software version of your iPod.

• The controls on your iPod are not operational when you operate your iPod using the OSD of this unit.

• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel or in the OSD of this unit.

• The name of the song being played appears in the front panel display up to 14 alphanumeric characters.

• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other

components” on page 91.

• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in

“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 105.

You need to first assign the remote control code to V-AUX

on the remote control to control your iPod when “V-AUX”

is selected as the input source.

1 Press V-AUX on the remote control to select

“V-AUX” as the input source.

2 Press CODE SET on the remote control using

a ball point pen or a similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code

number “81981”.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice, and the remote control code for V-AUX

is set.

Once the remote control code is assigned to V-AUX on the

remote control, you can control your iPod when “V-AUX”

is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod

can be done with or without the aid of the OSD of this

unit.

■ Controlling iPod without using the OSD

Once “V-AUX” is selected as the input source, you can

perform the basic operations of your iPod (see page 91)

using the supplied remote control without the aid of the

OSD of this unit.

Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.

For a complete list of the remote control buttons used to control

your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other

components” on page 91.

USING iPod

Notes

Setting the remote control code

V-AUX

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

Flashes

STEREO

EFFECT

STANDARD

SPEAKERS

MUSIC

SELECT

ENHANCER

ENTERTAIN

EXTD SUR.

NIGHT

MOVIE

DIRECT ST.

STRAIGHT

ENT.

TRANSMIT

Flashes

Controlling iPod

Note

USING iPod®

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Controlling iPod using the OSD

Once “V-AUX” is selected as the input source, you can

perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the

supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD of this

unit. You can also browse the songs stored on your iPod in

the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for

your iPod to suit your personal preferences.

• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.

• The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your

iPod.

• The “Setup” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the

OSD.

• Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between the

“Setup” parameter settings.

• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your

iPod in the OSD. Instead, you must use the controls on your

iPod to select the desired photos or video clips. For details, see

“Controlling iPod without using the OSD” on page 98.

• Press MENU on the remote control to move back to the

previous menu level.

• For a complete list of the remote control buttons used to control

your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other

components” on page 91.

1 Press DISPLAY on the remote control.

The following display appears in the OSD.

2 Press u / d on the remote control to select

the desired menu and then press ENTER to

enter the selected menu.

Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists),

Albums (albums), Songs (songs),

Genres (genres), Composers (composers),

Setup (setup)

• Playlists > Songs

• Artists > Albums > Songs

• Albums > Songs

• Songs

• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs

• Composers > Albums > Songs

• Setup > Shuffle, Repeat, Onscreen, FL Scroll

Shuffle Shuffle

Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a

random order.

Choices: Off, Songs, Albums

• Select “Off

” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in a

random order.

• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in a

random order.

When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the

highlighted letter “S” appears in the top right corner while songs

or albums are being shuffled.

Repeat Repeat

Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a

sequence of songs.

Choices: Off, One, All

• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.

• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.

• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of

songs.

When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the

highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner while one

song or a sequence of songs are being repeated.

On-screen display time Onscreen

Use this feature to set the amount of time for which the

OSD is displayed after you perform a certain operation on

your iPod.

Choices: Always, 5s, 10s

• Select “Always” to display the OSD unceasingly while

you are operating your iPod.

• Select “5s” to turn off the OSD 5 seconds after you

perform a certain operation on your iPod.

• Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you

perform a certain operation on your iPod.

Front panel display scroll FL Scroll

Use this feature to set whether to display the iPod

operation status in the front panel display in a continuous

manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once.

Choices: Cont, Once

• Select “Cont” to display the iPod operation status in

the front panel display in a continuous manner.

• Select “Once” to display the iPod operation status in

the front panel display by 14 alphanumeric characters

at once.

Notes

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Songs

Genres

Composers

Setup

iPod Top

DISPLAY

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Note

RESETTING THE SYSTEM

100

Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.

• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup

menu parameters will not be initialized.

• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.

To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it

outward to the OFF position.

1 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to turn

off this unit.

2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the

front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF

inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.

This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu

appears in the front panel display.

3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front

panel to select “PRESET”.

4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front

panel repeatedly to select “RESET”.

Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure

without making any changes.

5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to

confirm your selection and turn off this unit.

RESETTING THE SYSTEM

Notes

ZONE 2

ON/OFF

ZONE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO PORTABLEL AUDIO R

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

ON/OFF

MAIN ZONE

MASTER

SILENT CINEMA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

ON OFF

1-2,5 2,4

LEVEL

(U.S.A. model)

MASTER

ON OFF

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

MASTER

ON OFF

While holding

down

PROGRAM

PRESET-CANCEL

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

PRESET-RESET

MASTER

ON OFF

TROUBLESHOOTING

101

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit fails to turn

on or enters the

standby mode soon

after the power is

turned on.

The power cable is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cable firmly.

—

The speaker impedance setting is

incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this

unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire

for each connection does not touch anything other

than its respective connection.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

or strong static electricity).

Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the

power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then

use it normally.

—

No sound Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

18-23

“INPUT MODE” is set to “DTS” or

“ANALOG”.

Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO”.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT

selector on the front panel (or the input selector

buttons on the remote control) and MULTI CH

INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the

remote control).

31, 37

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.

The front speakers to be used have not

been selected properly.

Select the set of front speakers with SPEAKERS A or

B on the front panel or SPEAKERS on the remote

control.

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control

to resume audio output and then adjust the volume.

“INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”

while playing a source encoded in DTS.

Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”.

Signals this unit cannot reproduce are

being input from a source component,

such as a CD-ROM.

Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this

unit.

—

No picture The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.

102

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.

26, 89

Check that the speaker wires are not touching each

other and then turn this unit back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control

to resume audio output.

Sound is heard from

the speaker on one

side only.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER

LEVEL”.

Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings.

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When playing a monaural source with a

CINEMA DSP program, the source signal

is directed to the center channel, and the

front and surround speakers output effect

sounds.

No sound is heard

from the center

speaker.

“CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE”.

Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.

One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for

“6ch Stereo”) has been selected.

Try another sound field program.

No sound is heard

from the surround

speakers.

“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE”.

Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.

This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode

and a monaural source is being played

back.

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel so

that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel

display.

No sound is heard

from the surround

back speaker.

“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE” and “SUR. B SP” is

automatically set to “NONE”.

Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or

“LRG”.

“SUR. B SP” in “SET MENU” is set to

“NONE”.

Set “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.

No sound is heard

from the subwoofer.

“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is

set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or

DTS signal is being played.

Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.

“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is

set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-

channel source is being played.

Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.

The source does not contain low-

frequency signals.

103

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

Dolby Digital or DTS

sources cannot be

played. (Dolby Digital

or DTS indicator in

the front panel

display does not light

up.)

The connected component is not set to

output Dolby Digital or DTS digital

signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the operating

instructions for your component.

—

“INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”.

A humming sound is

heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

—

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the AUDIO

OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned

off.

Turn on the power of the component.

—

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

It is not possible to record the sound effect

with a recording component.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT

jack.

The source component is not connected to

the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks.

19, 21

Some components cannot record the

Dolby Digital or DTS sources.

A source cannot be

recorded by an

analog component

connected to the

AUDIO OUT (REC)

jacks.

The source component is not connected to

the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.

Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO

IN jacks.

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings of this

unit cannot be

changed.

“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU”

is set to “ON”.

Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet

and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

—

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears in the front

panel display.

Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio

frequency equipment.

This unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment.

—

The picture is

disturbed.

The video source uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent dubbing.

This unit suddenly

enters the standby

mode.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then

turn it back on.

—

104

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Tuner

■ XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel

display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multi-path interference.

—

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned into.

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

Set preset stations

47, 48

The desired station

cannot be tuned into

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and orient it for the best reception.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Noises result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

—

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set.

—

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

CHECK ANTENNA

The XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna

accessory is not connected to the XM jack

of this unit or does not work properly.

Check the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna

accessory connections and orient it for the best

reception level.

UPDATING

The XM user encryption code is being

updated.

Wait until the encryption code is updated.

—

NO SIGNAL

The signal is too weak. Check the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna

accessory connections and orient it for the best

reception level.

It takes longer than four seconds for audio

or text data to be decoded.

Wait until the decoding process has finished.

—

OFF AIR

The XM Satellite Radio channel you

selected is not currently broadcasting any

signals.

Check the channel number again or select another

XM Satellite Radio channel.

—

<XM> - - -

The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer

available.

- - - / - - -

No artist name or song title is available.

<CAT> - - -

No channels are available for the selected

category.

Select another channel category by pressing

CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on

the remote control) repeatedly.

105

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Remote control

■ iPod

In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod

(see page 22).

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The remote control

does not work nor

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-

axis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.

The remote control code is not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF

REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this

manual.

Try setting another code for the same manufacturer

using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at

the end of this manual.

The library code of the remote control and

the remote control ID of this unit do not

match.

Match the remote control ID of this unit with the

corresponding remote control library code.

89, 93

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

Note

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit is in the middle of recognizing

the connection with your iPod.

This unit is in the middle of acquiring

song lists from your iPod.

Connect error

There is a problem with the signal path

from your iPod to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect the YAMAHA iPod

universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Try resetting your iPod.

—

Unknown type

The iPod being used is not supported by

this unit.

Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod

mini are supported.

—

iPod connected

Your iPod is properly stationed in a

YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as

YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the

DOCK terminal of this unit, and the

connection between your iPod and this

unit is complete.

Disconnected

Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA

iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold

separately) connected to the DOCK

terminal of this unit.

Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal

dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to

the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Unable to play

This unit cannot play back the songs

currently stored on your iPod.

Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod

are playable.

—

Store some other playable music files on your iPod.

—

GLOSSARY

106

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3

front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio

channels. With an additional channel especially for bass

effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system

has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1

channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround

speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and

surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby

Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to

minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels

and the precise sound orientation generated using digital

sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented

excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound

environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel

configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a

matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the

2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby

Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks

recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and

realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-

over” and “fly-around” effects.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.

This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel

playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center

channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of

only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology. There are three modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie

sources and “Game mode” for game sources.

■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete

multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel

sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode”

for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for

2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game

sources.

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog

(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is

widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,

and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby

Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital

signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the

volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects

and directionality.

■ DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality

for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully

backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers

to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz

sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/

24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24

master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-

motion video for music programs and motion picture

soundtracks on DVD video.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy

the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of

DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces

practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically,

front left and right, center, surround left and right, and

LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels).

This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-

channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel

to the existing 5.1-channel format.

■ ITU-R

ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU

(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R

recommends a standard speaker placement which is used

in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering

purposes.

GLOSSARY

Audio information

107

GLOSSARY

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The

frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low-frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-

channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range channels with higher

separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There

are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources

and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.

■ Neural Surround

Neural Surround

™

represents the latest advancement in

surround technology and has been adopted by XM

Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround

recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural

Surround

™

employs psychoacoustic frequency domain

processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound

stage with superior channel separation and localization of

audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to

7.1 multi-channel surround playback.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code

Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can

be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,

while the dynamic range representing the sound level

difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.

In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider

the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the

higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the

sound level can be reproduced.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB

and P

R signals for the chrominance. Color can be

reproduced more faithfully with this system because each

of these signals is independent. The component signal is

also called the “color difference signal” because the

luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A

monitor with component input jacks is required in order to

output component signals.

■ Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal

is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:

color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite

video jack on a video component transmits these three

elements combined.

■ S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the

S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss

and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

Video information

108

GLOSSARY

■ CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for

acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room

size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in

the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured

data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original

sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,

Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual

experience of movie theater in the listening room of your

own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound field so that

accurate representations of all the sound field programs

can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects even without any surround speakers by

using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to

enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker

system that does not include a center speaker.

Sound field program information

SPECIFICATIONS

109

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................... 95 W

• Maximum Power (EIAJ)

[Asia, China, Korea and General models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ..........................................................135 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 130/165/195/240 W

• Maximum Output Power [Europe model]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω .........................................................145 W

• IEC Output Power [Europe and Asia models]

1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 105 W

• Damping Factor (IHF)

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 120 or more

• Frequency Response

CD terminal to Front L/R ...................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)

............................................................................... 0.06% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off.................. 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R .......... 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Tone Control (Front L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ..................................................... ±10 dB/60 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz

• Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Output Level/Output Impedance

REC OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER ............................................................. 4 V/1.2 kΩ

ZONE 2 OUTPUT ............................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type .......................................................... PAL/NTSC

• Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• Usable Sensitivity (IHF)........................................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB

• Frequency Response .......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[General model] .............. AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[Asia model] ................................... AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 350 W/440 VA

[Other models] ................................................................... 360 W

• Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less

•AC Outlets

[Australia model] ............................... 1 (Total 100 W maximum)

[U.S.A., Canada and China models] ... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)

[Europe, Asia and General models] ..... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 171 x 393 mm

(17.1 x 6.7 x 15.5 in)

• Weight ..................................................................... 11 kg (24.3 lbs)

SPECIFICATIONS

APPENDIX-i

LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES

CABLE TV RECEIVER

ABC 10003, 10008,

10014, 10017,

10033

AMERICAST 10899

BELL & HOWELL

10014

BELL SOUTH 10899

CLEARMASTER

10883

CLEARMAX 10883

COOLMAX 10883

DIGEO 11187

DIGI 10637

DIRECTOR 10476

DUMONT 10637

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

10003, 10276,

10476, 10810

GOLDSTAR 10144

HAMLIN 10009, 10273

I3 MICRO 11602

JERROLD 10003, 10012,

10014, 10276,

10476, 10810

MACOM 10033

MEMOREX 10000

MOTOROLA 10014, 10276,

10476, 10810,

11187, 11254,

11376

MULTITECH 10883

MYRIO 11602

PACE 10008, 10237,

11877

PANASONIC 10000, 10107

PANTHER 10637

PARAGON 10000

PHILIPS 10317, 11305

PIONEER 10144, 10533,

10877, 11877

PULSAR 10000

QUASAR 10000

RADIOSHACK

10883

RCA 11256

REGAL 10273, 10279

RUNCO 10000

SAMSUNG 10144

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

10008, 10017,

10477, 10877,

11877

SEJIN 11602

SONY 11006

STARCOM 10003

SUPERCABLE

10276

SUPERMAX 10883

THOMSON 11256

TOCOM 10012

TORX 10003

TOSHIBA 10000

TRISTAR 10883

V2 10883

VIEWMASTER10883

VISION 10883

VORTEX VIEW10883

ZENITH 10000, 10525,

10899

CABLE/PVR

COMBINATION

AMERICAST 10899

DIGEO 11187

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

10476, 10810

JERROLD 10476, 10810

MOTOROLA 10476, 10810,

11187, 11376

PACE 10237, 11877

PIONEER 10877, 11877

RCA 11256

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

10877, 11877

SONY 11006

SUPERCABLE

10276

THOMSON 11256

ZENITH 10899

DBS/PVR

COMBINATION

DIRECTV 10099, 10392,

10639, 11076,

11142, 11377,

11392, 11442,

11443, 11444,

11640

DISH NETWORK SYSTEM

10775, 11505

DISHPRO 10775, 11505

ECHOSTAR 10775, 11170,

11505

EXPRESSVU 10775

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

11142, 11442,

11443, 11444

JVC 11170

MOTOROLA 10869

PHILIPS 11142, 11442

PROSCAN 10392

RCA 11392

SAMSUNG 11442

SONY 10639, 11640

STAR CHOICE

10869

SATELLITE RECEIVER

ALPHASTAR 10772

CHAPARRAL 10053, 10216

CROSSDIGITAL

11109

DIRECTV 10099, 10247,

10392, 10566,

10639, 10724,

10749, 10819,

11076, 11108,

11109, 11142,

11377, 11392,

11414, 11442,

11443, 11444,

11609, 11639,

11640, 11749,

11856

DISH NETWORK SYSTEM

10775, 11005,

11170, 11505,

11775

DISHPRO 10775, 11005,

11505, 11775

ECHOSTAR 10269, 10280,

10775, 11005,

11170, 11505,

11775

EXPRESSVU 10775, 11775

GE 10392, 10566

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

10869

GOI 10775, 11775

GOODMANS 11246

HISENSE 11535

HITACHI 10819, 11250

HOMECABLE 10238

HTS 10775, 11775

HUGHES 10749, 11442,

11749

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

10749, 11142,

11442, 11443,

11444, 11749

ILO 11535

IQ 10210

IQ PRISM 10210

JERROLD 10869

JVC 10775, 11170,

11775

LEGEND 10269

LG 11226, 11414

MAGNAVOX 10722, 10724

MEMOREX 10269, 10724

MITSUBISHI 10749

MOTOROLA 10856, 10869

NEC 11270

NEXT LEVEL 10869

PANASONIC 10247, 10701

PAYSAT 10724

PHILIPS 10099, 10722,

10724, 10749,

10819, 11076,

11142, 11442,

11749

PIONEER 11442

PROSCAN 10392, 10566

PROTON 11535

RADIOSHACK

10869

RCA 10143, 10392,

10566, 10855,

11392

REALISTIC 10052

SAMSUNG 11108, 11109,

11142, 11276,

11377, 11442,

11609

SANYO 11219

SONY 10639, 11639,

11640

STAR CHOICE 10869

STS 10210

TIVO 11142, 11442,

11443, 11444

TOSHIBA 10082, 10749,

10790, 10819,

11285, 11749

ULTIMATETV 11392, 11640

UNIDEN 10052, 10074,

10238, 10722,

10724

US DIGITAL 11535

USDTV 11535

VOOM 10869

ZENITH 11856

HDTV DECORDER

ACCURIAN 11653

EPSON 11563, 11650

LG 11415

MACRO IMAGE TECHNOLOGY

11383

MOTOROLA 11363

MYHD 11383

PANASONIC 11120

PIONEER 11010

PRINCETON 10113, 10295

SAMSUNG 11190, 11490

SASEM 11641

SENSORY SCIENCE

11126

SHARP 11010

SYLVANIA 11563

TELEMANN 11604

VIEWSONIC 11329

VIZIO 11126

Documenttranscriptie

RX-V559_U_cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, November 22, 2005 2:20 PM U RX-V559 RX-V559 AV Receiver © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WG73420 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 i 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – This unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning this unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. ii CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit during a lightning storm. Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 16 17 18 19 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. Install this unit near the AC wall outlet where the power cable plug can be reached easily. Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, and then disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet. VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are: Asia model ............................ 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ........ 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear panel of this unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. iii CONTENTS FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 12 BASIC OPERATION USING VIDEO FEATURES ............................... 39 Displaying the input source information ................. 39 Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 40 Playing video sources in the background ................ 40 ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND .................... 41 Enjoying multi-channel sources in surround ........... 41 Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround.................. 42 Using Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 43 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS .............................63 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 63 Sound field program descriptions............................ 64 Changing sound field parameter settings................. 66 Sound field program speaker layouts ...................... 72 ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU ............................................................75 Using SET MENU................................................... 77 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 78 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 83 3 OPTION MENU................................................... 85 ADVANCED SETUP ............................................88 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................90 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ............................................ 90 Setting the remote control code ............................... 92 Setting library codes ................................................ 93 Resetting all remote control codes........................... 94 USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION .....95 Connecting Zone 2................................................... 95 Controlling Zone 2................................................... 96 USING iPod® .........................................................98 Setting the remote control code ............................... 98 Controlling iPod ...................................................... 98 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Using SILENT CINEMA ........................................ 33 Muting the audio output........................................... 33 Selecting the night listening mode........................... 33 Selecting the input mode ......................................... 34 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 34 Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 35 Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode .................................................... 36 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 37 Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo............................................... 38 Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 38 Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound.............................. 38 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS ADVANCED OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 31 USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 33 Connecting the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory..................................... 52 XM Satellite Radio controls and functions.............. 53 Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 54 Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 55 Selecting the XM Satellite Radio search mode ....... 56 Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 60 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information .......................................................... 61 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS BASIC SETUP ...................................................... 28 XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING.................52 BASIC OPERATION Placing speakers....................................................... 12 Connecting speakers ................................................ 13 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 16 Audio and video signal flow.................................... 17 Connecting a TV...................................................... 18 Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB................................................. 19 Connecting a CD player, an MD player or a tape deck....................................................... 21 Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........ 22 Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder ......................................... 23 Connecting a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player .................................... 23 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 24 Connecting the power cable..................................... 25 Setting the speaker impedance................................. 26 Turning on and off the power .................................. 27 Automatic tuning ..................................................... 45 Manual tuning.......................................................... 46 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 47 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 48 Selecting preset stations........................................... 49 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 50 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Front panel display .................................................... 9 Rear panel ................................................................ 11 RECORDING........................................................44 FM/AM TUNING..................................................45 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION RESETTING THE SYSTEM.............................100 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................101 GLOSSARY.........................................................106 Audio information ................................................. 106 Video information.................................................. 107 Sound field program information .......................... 108 SPECIFICATIONS.............................................109 1 FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 6-channel power amplifier iPod controlling capability ◆ Minimum RMS output power (0.06% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω) Front: 95 W + 95 W Center: 95 W Surround: 95 W + 95 W Surround back: 95 W ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini Sound field programs ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/ 24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/ Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only) ◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the “XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory” sold separately) ◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multichannels, resulting in a full surround sound experience Other features ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system ◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video → component video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, backlighting input selector buttons, and an iPod (stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal) controlling capability ◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility ◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and Zone 2 using ZONE CONTROL ◆ PORTABLE mini analog input jack on the front panel for a portable audio player ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality stereo Notes • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2003 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All right reserved. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. iPod® “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. 2 Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation. GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control CODE SET Batteries (2) (AA, R6, UM-3) TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD AM loop antenna 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) SLEEP XM MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE MUSIC ENTERTAIN AMP SOURCE TV STEREO MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Asia and General models) ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND Indoor FM antenna (U.K., Europe, Australia and Korea models) ENTER A-E/CAT. RETURN A-E/CAT. DISPLAY XM MEMORY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP Installing batteries in the remote control 1 Notes 3 2 1 Take off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6, UM-3) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. – the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use an old battery together with a new one. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel Note The XM Satellite Radio controlling functions in the following buttons (SEARCH MODE, CATEGORY, PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h, MEMORY, and DISPLAY) are only applicable to the U.S.A. model and are operational only when “XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “XM Satellite Radio controls and functions” on page 53. 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 A 9 0 VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L NEXT SEARCH MODE ON DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA (U.S.A. model) B C DE F G H 1 MASTER ON/OFF Turns on or off this unit (see page 27). 2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF Turns on the main zone or sets it to the standby mode (see page 27). Notes • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. • When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. • This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. 3 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control (see page 8). 4 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit (see page 9). 4 I J K L 5 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT • Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 45). • Selects the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust when “TUNER” is not selected as the input source (see page 35). 6 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h, LEVEL +/– • Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when “TUNER” is selected as the input source. The colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see page 45). • Selects the tuning frequency when “TUNER” is selected as the input source. The colon (:) is not displayed in the front panel display (see page 45). • Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using NEXT when “TUNER” is not selected as the input source (see page 35). 7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning (see page 47). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 9 ZONE 2 ON/OFF Turns on Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode (see page 96). Note This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. 0 ZONE CONTROL Switches the zone you want to control between the main zone and Zone 2 (see page 96). y When Zone 2 is selected, the ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing, perform the desired operation. A VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. y This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level. B PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones (see page 33). Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack or the speaker terminals. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. C SPEAKERS A/B Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. D PRESET/TUNING, EDIT • Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h between selecting preset station numbers and selecting the tuning frequency. • Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 50). E STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the “STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing (see page 38). INTRODUCTION 8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned off) (see page 45). F FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 45). G PROGRAM selector Selects sound field programs or adjusts the bass/treble balance in conjunction with TONE CONTROL (see page 32). H TONE CONTROL Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left and right speakers in conjunction with the PROGRAM selector (see page 32). I INPUT MODE Selects either digital or analog input signals exclusively or sets this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the corresponding input signals when one component is connected via both digital and analog connections (see page 34). J INPUT selector Selects the desired input source. K MULTI CH INPUT Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 37). Note The input source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks takes priority over the source selected with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). L VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player (see page 23). y To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. Notes • The audio signals input at the PORTABLE mini jack take priority over the ones input at the AUDIO L/R jacks. • The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 90. Notes • The XM Satellite Radio controlling functions in the following buttons (XM, XM MEMORY, SRCH MODE, DISPLAY, cursor buttons u / d / j / i, numeric buttons and ENT.) are only applicable to the U.S.A. model and are operational only when “XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “XM Satellite Radio controls and functions” on page 53. • The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area below depends on the component selector switch position. Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. To control the TUNER functions, set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 2 0 CODE SET A TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER B MD SLEEP XM 3 DVD DTV V-AUX DVR D TUNER AMP SOURCE TV VOL C MULTI CH IN CBL TV CH VOLUME E F TV 4 5 6 7 TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN G 1 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 ENT. 10 EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND H I J ENTER A-E/CAT. 9 Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate (see page 8). 2 CODE SET Use to set up remote control codes (see page 92). 3 Input selector buttons Select the input source you want to control. Note The corresponding input selector button for the currently selected input source lights up for approximately 5 seconds after you press any buttons on the remote control, showing which source component is currently being operated. MOVIE STANDARD 8 ■ Controlling this unit A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP K 4 Sound field program selector buttons Select sound field programs (see page 63). – Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in surround (see page 42). – Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and 6.1-channel playback of multi-channel sources (see page 41). – Use DIRECT ST. to play back 2-channel sources in hi-fi stereo sound (see page 38). 5 SPEAKERS Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. Press this button repeatedly to toggle as follows: A on B on A and B off 6 ENHANCER Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode (see page 36). (U.S.A. model) 6 7 LEVEL Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the output level (see page 35). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i, ENTER Select and adjust the sound field program parameters or the “SET MENU” parameters. 0 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared signals. A STANDBY Sets this unit to the standby mode (see page 27). AMP Operates this unit. INTRODUCTION 9 RETURN Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters. F Component selector switch Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area. SOURCE Operates the component selected with an input selector button (see page 91). TV Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or (see page 90). Note Notes This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. • To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 92. • When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and (see page 92), priority is given to the one set for DTV/ CBL. B POWER Turns on this unit (see page 27). Note This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. C SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (see page 34). D MULTI CH IN Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source when using an external decoder, etc. (see page 37). E VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. G MUTE Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level (see page 33). H STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the “STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing (see page 38). I NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 33). J SET MENU Enters “SET MENU” (see page 77). K DISPLAY Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video monitor (see page 40). 7 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ■ Controlling the TUNER functions ■ Using the remote control Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. 4 Numeric buttons Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations. (U.S.A. model) 7 BAND Switches the reception band between FM and AM (see page 45). VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER 8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i Press j / i to select a preset station group (A to E) and u / d to select a preset station number (1 to 8) (see page 49). FM/AM PRESET/TUNING EDIT A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L ZONE CONTROL NEXT SEARCH MODE ON CATEGORY LEVEL DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 30 30 CODE SET Approximately 6 m (20 ft) TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD SLEEP XM MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV V-AUX DVR TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE MUSIC ENTERTAIN TUNER AMP SOURCE TV STEREO 1 STANDARD 2 3 SELECT EXTD SUR. MOVIE 4 DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND ENTER A-E/CAT. RETURN A-E/CAT. DISPLAY XM MEMORY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places 8 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display INTRODUCTION Note The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. model and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up only when “XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 55. 2 3 4 1 t 7 8 9 0 A C B pDVR pV-AUX pDTV/CBL pDVD pMD/CD-R pTUNER pCD pXM 96 24 DOCK MATRIX DISCRETE ENHANCER q EX 5 6 VIRTUAL STANDARD SP SILENT CINEMA A B ZONE2 NIGHT AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY HiFi DSP PTY HOLD PS PTY RT CT EON SLEEP q DIGITAL q PL PCM neural mS dB E D F G H I J K Note The neural indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and lights up only when the Neural Surround decoder is selected (see page 42). 2 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on (see page 36). 3 Sound field indicators Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Surround left DSP sound field Surround right DSP sound field Surround back DSP sound field 4 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 43). 5 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. 96/24 LFE L C R SL SB SR L M N Q 1 Decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the decoders of this unit function. dB MUTE ft q PL x q PL VOLUME O P (U.K. and Europe models only) 6 DOCK indicator Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 22). 7 SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 33). 8 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 64). 9 AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode (see page 45). 0 TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station (see page 45). A STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit (see page 45). B MEMORY indicator Flashes to show that a station can be stored (see page 47). 9 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS C VOLUME level indicator Indicates the current volume level. D PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. E STANDARD indicator Lights up when the “SUR. STANDARD” or “SUR. ENHANCED” program is selected (see page 42). F SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. G Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 33). H ZONE2 indicator Lights up when Zone 2 is turned on (see page 96). I NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see page 33). J HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 64). K Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. L SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 34). M MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 33). N 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. O Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal (see page 29). P LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. Q Radio Data System indicators (U.K. and Europe models only) Lights up when the Radio Data System data is being received. EON Lights up when the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 10 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 45 6 MULTI CH INPUT OUTPUT 7 DIGITAL OUTPUT CENTER MD/CD-R DIGITAL INPUT MD/CD-R DVD DTV/CBL 8 9 XM DOCK 0 INTRODUCTION 1 DVD COMPONENT VIDEO DVD Y MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) IN CD DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT VIDEO TUNER AM ANT GND MONITOR OUT DVD FRONT IN DTV/CBL SURROUND DVR OUT S VIDEO SUB WOOFER ZONE 2 SUB WOOFER OPTICAL OPTICAL PB DVR PR Y PB PR COAXIAL MONITOR OUT DTV/CBL MONITOR OUT SPEAKERS FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND FRONT A REMOTE IN OUT CONTROL OUT +12V 15mA MAX. B CENTER SURROUND BACK (U.S.A. model) A B C D E 2 Audio component jacks See page 21 for connection information. 9 DOCK terminal Use to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) where your iPod can be stationed. See page 22 for connection information. 3 MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 23 for connection information. 0 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks See pages 18 and 19 for connection information. 4 ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks See page 95 for connection information. A REMOTE jacks See page 95 for details. Note B CONTROL OUT jack This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. 1 Video component jacks See pages 18 and 19 for connection information. These jacks output analog signals only. 5 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack See page 13 for connection information. 6 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack See page 21 for connection information. 7 DIGITAL INPUT jacks See page 19 for connection information. 8 XM jack (U.S.A. model only) See page 52 for connection information. C Antenna terminals See page 24 for connection information. D Speaker terminals See page 13 for connection information. E AC OUTLET(S) Use to supply power to your other audiovisual components. See page 25 for details. ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) See page 25 for details. 11 CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R* speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources. * ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). FL Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Place the center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. FR C 30˚ SL SR Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. 60˚ SL 80˚ SR SB FR SW FL SR C SL SB 1.8 m (6 ft) 12 Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Surround back speaker (SB) The surround back speaker supplements the surround speakers and provides more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place this speaker directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for hi-fi stereo sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION Notes • A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. • The low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 78 and 79) are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 79). Front speakers (A) Right Left Surround speakers Right Left 1 2 4 5 Subwoofer 7 OUTPUT SUB WOOFER SPEAKERS FRONT SURROUND A B CENTER SURROUND BACK (U.S.A. model) Front speakers (B) 3 6 Center speaker Surround back speaker 13 PREPARATION • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 27). • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • If you are to use 4 or 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 26). CONNECTIONS FRONT terminals Connect one or two front speaker systems (1, 2) to these terminals. If you use only one front speaker system, connect it to the FRONT A or B terminal. CENTER terminals Connect a center speaker (3) to these terminals. SURROUND terminals Connect surround speakers (4, 5) to these terminals. SURROUND BACK terminals Connect a surround back speaker (6) to these terminals. SUBWOOFER jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (7) (such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System) to this jack. 14 1 7 2 4 3 5 Speaker layout 6 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting the speaker cable ■ Connecting the banana plug (except U.K., Europe and Asia models) 1 The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector widely used to terminate speaker cables. Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. Banana plug 10 mm (0.4 in) 2 Insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Loosen the knob. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 Tighten the knob. PREPARATION 2 1 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side of each terminal. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 15 CONNECTIONS Information on jacks and cable plugs Note You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. Audio jacks and cable plugs DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO L R COAXIAL OPTICAL (White) (Red) (Orange) L R C AUDIO Left and right Coaxial analog audio digital audio cable plugs cable plug Video jacks and cable plugs PORTABLE VIDEO S VIDEO (Yellow) O V S Composite video cable plug S-video cable plug M Optical digital audio cable plug Stereo analog audio mini cable plug COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR (Green) (Blue) (Red) Y PB PR Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has four types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 85), the video signals input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks are converted and output at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks interchangeably. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Note Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. PORTABLE jack For analog audio signals transmitted via stereo analog audio mini cables. 16 VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of S-video cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. CONNECTIONS Audio and video signal flow ■ Audio signal flow for AUDIO OUT (REC) Input Output AUDIO OUT (REC) DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL Digital audio L R L PREPARATION DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL R AUDIO Analog audio PORTABLE Digital output Analog output Note This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus, audio signals input at the analog jacks are output only at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise, audio signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are output only at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. ■ Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT Output (MONITOR OUT) Input Y PB PR Y PB PR COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO Analog video VIDEO Through Video conversion when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 85) Note When video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input signals is as follows where the video signals input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks have the top priority: COMPONENT VIDEO > S VIDEO > VIDEO 17 CONNECTIONS Connecting a TV Connect your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. (U.S.A. model) COMPONENT VIDEO Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT S VIDEO V S Y PB PR S-video in Component video in Video in TV 18 PB PR CONNECTIONS Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB Connect your DVD player, DVD recorder, VCR or STB (set-top box) using the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 18). The cable TV receiver and the satellite receiver are examples of the STB. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Notes ■ Connecting a DVD player DVD player S O AUDIO C Coaxial audio out V Optical audio out L S-video out R Component video out Video out Audio out Y PR PB (U.S.A. model) DIGITAL INPUT DVD DVD OPTICAL COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO DVD Y DVD PB PR DVD VIDEO S VIDEO 19 PREPARATION • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 85), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 18). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks. • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 85), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 83). • If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting a DVD recorder or a VCR (U.S.A. model) AUDIO COMPONENT VIDEO DVR Y DVR OUT IN DVR OUT L V V S S-video in R S-video out L Video out Audio in Audio out R PR S VIDEO Video in IN VIDEO PB S Y PB PR Component video out DVD recorder or VCR ■ Connecting an STB Cable TV receiver or satellite receiver S O AUDIO Optical audio out V S-video out L Video out R Audio out Component video out Y PB PR (U.S.A. model) DIGITAL INPUT DTV/CBL COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB OPTICAL DTV/CBL VIDEO 20 DTV/CBL DTV/CBL S VIDEO PR CONNECTIONS Connecting a CD player, an MD player or a tape deck Connect your CD player, MD player or tape deck via analog and/or digital connections. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Note CD player Audio out R L (U.S.A. model) DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R MD/ OUT OPTICAL (PLAY) CD-R (REC) O Audio out R L R L Audio in Optical audio in IN CD DIGITAL INPUT MD/CD-R OPTICAL O Optical audio out AUDIO MD recorder or tape deck 21 PREPARATION To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 83). CONNECTIONS Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. Connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. Once the connection is complete, station your iPod in the YAMAHA iPod universal dock. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • You need a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) and its dedicated cable compatible with the DOCK terminal of this unit. • Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, this unit begins the signal transmission with your iPod. • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK indicator lights up in the front panel display. If the connection between your iPod and this unit fails, a status message appears in the front panel display. For a complete list of connection status messages, see the iPod section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 105. • Only analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. • Depending on the type of iPod, you may need to insert one of the iPod adapters supplied with a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) into the dock slot before you station your iPod. iPod YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) (U.S.A. model) DOCK 22 CONNECTIONS Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Notes • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 37), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, signals are output only from the front left and right channels. Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player to this unit. CAUTION Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. Notes • The audio signals input at the PORTABLE mini jack take priority over the ones input at the AUDIO L/R jacks. • The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal takes priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. (U.S.A. model) VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L NEXT SEARCH MODE ON DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA VIDEO AUX VIDEO L AUDIO R PORTABLE CENTER FRONT SURROUND V L R SUB WOOFER R Portable audio player Center out L Subwoofer out Front out R Surround out Game console or video camera L Audio out MULTI CH INPUT Audio out L/R Video out M Multi-format player or external decoder 23 PREPARATION CAUTION Connecting a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player CONNECTIONS Connecting the FM and AM antennas Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. 2 Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT terminal. 3 Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT terminal. 4 Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal back into place. 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the other lead wire to the GND terminal. Notes • Be sure to set the tuner frequency step (Asia and General models only) according to the frequency spacing in your area (see page 89). • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. AM loop antenna (supplied) Indoor FM antenna (supplied) (U.S.A. model) TUNER AM ANT GND FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. Outdoor AM antenna Use a 5 to 10 m (16.4 to 32.8 ft) of vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors from a window. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna y 1 24 Set up the AM loop antenna. Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to this unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception when you tune into AM stations (see page 45). CONNECTIONS Connecting the power cable Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet. (U.S.A. model) PREPARATION AC OUTLETS To the AC wall outlet ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) CAUTION The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire hazard. Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight slot screwdriver. Voltages are as follows: Asia model .........................220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ......110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz VOLTAGE SELECTOR 230240V Voltage indication ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) U.K. and Australia models ..................................... 1 outlet Korea model ............................................................... None Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected components. Connect the power cable of your other components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is supplied when the main zone or Zone 2 is turned on. However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when the main zone and Zone 2 are turned off or when MASTER ON/ OFF on the front panel is pressed and released outward to the OFF position. For information on the maximum power or the total power consumption of the components that can be connected to these outlet(s), see “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 109. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. 25 CONNECTIONS Setting the speaker impedance CAUTION 4 If you are to use 4 or 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”. The following display appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT 2,5 (U.S.A. model) EFFECT VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L NEXT SEARCH MODE ON DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA SP IMP.-6 MIN 2,4 3 1 2 5 Make sure this unit is turned off. See page 27 for details about turning on or off this unit. MASTER STRAIGHT EFFECT ON OFF Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select “SP IMP.”. The following display appears in the front panel display. PROGRAM SP IMP.-8 MIN 26 MASTER ON Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. While holding down 3 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. OFF Note The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. CONNECTIONS Turning on and off the power When all connections are complete, turn on this unit. MASTER ON/OFF (U.S.A. model) (U.S.A. model) CODE SET STANDBY TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER POWER VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL MD SLEEP XM MULTI CH IN CBL MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L NEXT SEARCH MODE ON DVD DTV V-AUX DVR TV VOL TV CH TUNER DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R PORTABLE AMP PREPARATION EFFECT SILENT CINEMA SOURCE VOLUME TV MAIN ZONE ON/OFF ■ Turning on this unit ■ Turning off this unit Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel again to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. MASTER MASTER ON OFF Front panel ON • Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or STANDBY on the remote control) to set the main zone to the standby mode. OFF Front panel MAIN ZONE STANDBY ON/OFF or Front panel Remote control • Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or POWER on the remote control) to turn on the main zone. MAIN ZONE POWER ON/OFF Front panel or Remote control Note MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER and STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. 27 BASIC SETUP BASIC SETUP The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort. Notes • Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit. • If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU” (see page 78). • Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 78). • Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter. • Press RETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level. STEREO CODE SET POWER TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD SLEEP XM 1 DTV DVR ENTERTAIN 3 4 EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 EFFECT PRESET/CH TUNER LEVEL AMP SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. RETURN SOURCE TV CH Press ENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP”. The following display appears in the OSD. ENT. ENTER TV VOL 4 MOVIE 2 SELECT MULTI CH IN CBL DVD V-AUX MUSIC 1 STANDARD VOLUME 2,13 3-12 .ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL DISPLAY XM MEMORY REC TV ENTER AUDIO A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. p (U.S.A. model) []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Set the component selector switch to AMP. 5 p 1 ;BASIC SETUP PRESET/CH Press u / d to select “ROOM” and then j / i to select the desired setting. AMP SOURCE PRESET/CH ;BASIC SETUP TV ENTER MENU SRCH MODE p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press u / d to select “BASIC SETUP”. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. 28 A-E/CAT. []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p SET MENU .;BASICSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO SET MENU 3 A-E/CAT. Press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. p 2 A-E/CAT. .ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL Select the size of the room where you have installed your speakers. In general, the room sizes are defined as follows: Choices: S, M, L [U.S.A. and Canada models] S (small) 16 x 13ft, 200ft2 (4.8 x 4.0m, 20m2) M (medium) 20 x 16ft, 300ft2 (6.3 x 5.0m, 30m2) L (large) 26 x 19ft, 450ft2 (7.9 x 5.8m, 45m2) [Other models] S (small) 3.6 x 2.8m, 10m2 M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0m, 20m2 L (large) 6.3 x 5.0m, 30m2 BASIC SETUP 6 Press d to select “SUBWOOFER” and then j / i to select the desired setting. PRESET/CH Press d to select “SETUP” and then j / i to select the desired setting. PRESET/CH ;BASIC SETUP ENTER A-E/CAT. 8 A-E/CAT. ROOM: S >M L .SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL ;BASIC SETUP ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk . SETUP:>OK CANCEL ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select 7 Press d to select “SPEAKERS” and then j / i to select the number of speakers connected to this unit. PRESET/CH y You can also press SET MENU to cancel the setup procedure. 9 Press ENTER to confirm your selection. PRESET/CH ;BASIC SETUP ENTER A-E/CAT. Choices: OK, CANCEL • Select “OK” to apply the settings you made. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the setup procedure without making any changes. A-E/CAT. ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES .SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. p Choice Display 2spk L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Center ;BASIC SETUP ;BASIC SETUP ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL .CHECK:Test Tone ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL .CHECK OK?;;;;YES p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p 4spk L C R SL SB SR Front L/R p L C R SL SB SR Speakers If you selected “OK” in step 8, each speaker outputs a test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:Test Tone” appears in the OSD for a few seconds and then “CHECK OK?” appears in the OSD. p 3spk p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Front L/R, Surround L/R y 5spk L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R 6spk L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back Check the speaker connections (see page 13) and adjust the “SPEAKERS” settings back in step 7, if necessary. 29 PREPARATION Choices: YES, NONE • Select “YES” if you have a subwoofer in your system. • Select “NONE” if you do not have a subwoofer in your system. p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select BASIC SETUP 10 Press j / i to select the desired setting. ;BASIC SETUP PRESET/CH ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL .CHECK OK?;;;;YES ENTER A-E/CAT. 12 A-E/CAT. Press u / d to select a speaker and then j / i to adjust the balance. The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. • If you selected “YES” in step 10, the setup procedure is completed and the display returns to the top “SET MENU” display. • If you selected “NO” in step 10, the front speaker level adjustment display appears in the front panel display. A-E/CAT. • Select “FR” to adjust the balance between the front left and right speakers. • Select “C” to adjust the balance between the front left and center speakers. • Select “SL” to adjust the balance between the front left and surround left speakers. • Select “SB” to adjust the balance between the surround left and surround back speakers. • Select “SR” to adjust the balance between the surround left and surround right speakers. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance between the front left speaker and the subwoofer. Press ENTER to confirm your selection. A-E/CAT. FR;;;;;;;;;; C;;;;;;;;;; SL;;;;;;;;;; SB;;;;;;;;;; SR;;;;;;;;;; SWFR;;;;;;;;;; []/[]:Select [<]/[>]:Adjust ENTER A-E/CAT. 13 Press SET MENU to exit from “BASIC SETUP”. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE 30 ;BASIC SETUP p 11 . p Choices: YES, NO • Select “YES” to complete the setup procedure if the test tone levels from each speaker were satisfactory. • Select “NO” to proceed to the speaker level adjustment menu in step 12 to balance the output level of each speaker. PRESET/CH PLAYBACK PLAYBACK CAUTION Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. (U.S.A. model) 3 VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY LEVEL MEMORY ZONE CONTROL Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired input source. TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L MAN'L/AUTO FM NEXT SEARCH MODE ON DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R MD INPUT PORTABLE SLEEP EFFECT SILENT CINEMA CD CD-R 3 5 TV MUTE CODE SET TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV CD CD-R STEREO STANDBY MD 3 2 DTV V-AUX DVR MUTE MUSIC ENTERTAIN 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 MULTI CH IN TUNER 2 EFFECT PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND TV V-AUX DVR TUNER Remote control ENTER A-E/CAT. SOURCE VOLUME DTV The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for a few seconds. ENT. 10 LEVEL TV CH Front panel 7 SLEEP XM AMP TV VOL MOVIE 1 STANDARD POWER CBL DVD TV INPUT DVD 5 Available input sources A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE DVR (U.S.A. model) V-AUX DVD 1 2 DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM VOLUME SP A Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Currently selected input source Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press SPEAKERS on the remote control repeatedly). Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B, the respective speakers are turned on or off. dB AUTO L R Currently selected input mode Notes • If you are to select an input source connected via digital connections, set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS” (see page 34). • For details about controlling XM Satellite Radio when “XM” is selected as the input source, see page 55. SPEAKERS A B 4 Front panel or Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. See page 45 for details about tuning instructions. AMP SPEAKERS SOURCE 9 TV Remote control 31 BASIC OPERATION 6,7 6 MULTI CH IN CBL or 2 XM PLAYBACK 5 Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. VOLUME or VOLUME 7 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control repeatedly) to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. See page 64 for details about sound field programs. PROGRAM Remote control Front panel 6 Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select “TREBLE” or “BASS” and then rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust the corresponding frequency response level. Front panel or STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 MOVIE 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 PROGRAM TONE CONTROL ENT. 10 EFFECT Remote control DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM VOLUME SP A TREBLE dB 0dB L R DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM VOLUME SP A • Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency response. • Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency response. TV Sports dB L R Currently selected surround field program Notes • Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. • When “TONE BYPASS” is set to “AUTO” (see page 82), and “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB, audio output automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry of this unit. • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front left and right speakers. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode (see page 38) is selected or when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 37). • To enjoy multi-channel sources in surround, see page 41 for details. 32 Notes • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 37). • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs are applied. • To display information about the currently selected input source in the OSD, see page 39 for details. USING AUDIO FEATURES USING AUDIO FEATURES Using SILENT CINEMA SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 64). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. Selecting the night listening mode The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on the type of material you are playing. 1 Notes • SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 37). • SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 38) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 38) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 38). Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”. AMP NIGHT SOURCE 10 TV Muting the audio output Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the audio output. y When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. MUTE y • You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTING TYPE” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 82). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. Note If you change the input source or the sound field program while the audio output is being muted, this unit resumes the audio output. 2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front panel display. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID Choices: MIN, MID, MAX • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. 33 BASIC OPERATION Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF • Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature. USING AUDIO FEATURES y AUTO “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. Notes DTS • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: – when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode (see page 38) is selected. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 37). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. ANALOG Note When “INPUT MODE” is set to “AUTO”, this unit automatically switches to the appropriate decoder if a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is detected. Using the sleep timer Selecting the input mode This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the following to select the type of input signals you want to use. y • We recommend setting “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default input mode of this unit by using the “INPUT MODE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (see page 84). Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to AC OUTLET(S) (see page 25). 1 Notes • To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, be sure to set “INPUT MODE” to “DTS”. • DTS decoding may not be performed correctly depending on the player even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. 1 INPUT MODE Available input sources DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM VOLUME SP A DVD Currently selected input source 34 MD dB AUTO L Currently selected input mode R CD-R SLEEP XM MULTI CH IN CBL 2 Press INPUT MODE on the front panel repeatedly to select the desired input mode. Press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the desired input source. CD Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel to select the desired input source. INPUT 2 Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals (2) Analog signals Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. DVD DTV V-AUX DVR TUNER Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. See page 45 for details about tuning instructions. USING AUDIO FEATURES 3 Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP Adjusting the speaker level You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Note This operation will override the level adjustments made in “BASIC SETUP” (see page 28) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see page 80). SLEEP 120min SLEEP OFF SLEEP y SLEEP 90min 30min SLEEP 60min The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R SP A TUNER pCD AMP SOURCE TV VOL VOLUME dB SLEEP 120min L VOLUME 1 TV XM SLEEP TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 BASIC OPERATION DVR This operation can also be performed using the control buttons on the front panel. Press NEXT on the front panel repeatedly to select the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust and then press LEVEL +/– on the front panel to adjust the output level. MOVIE R 10 ENT. EFFECT 1 Flashes PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE ENTER A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY REC DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD TUNER pCD MD/CD-R SP A AUDIO XM 2 DISC SKIP VOLUME SLEEP (U.S.A. model) dB STRAIGHT L R 1 Lights up 4 3 A-E/CAT. To cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press LEVEL on the remote control repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. AMP SOURCE LEVEL TV BAND TITLE SLEEP DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER pCD XM VOLUME SP A SLEEP OFF dB L R The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF” disappears from the front panel display after a few seconds. y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or MAIN ZONE ON/ OFF on the front panel) to set the main zone to the standby mode. • Select “FRONT L” to adjust the front left speaker output level. • Select “CENTER” to adjust the center speaker output level. • Select “FRONT R” to adjust the front right speaker output level. • Select “SUR. R” to adjust the surround right speaker output level. • Select “SUR. B” to adjust the surround back speaker output level. • Select “SUR. L” to adjust the surround left speaker output level. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the subwoofer output level. y Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing u / d. 35 USING AUDIO FEATURES 2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the speaker output level. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. 3 A-E/CAT. Press ENTER on the remote control when you have completed your adjustment. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is resampled to lower the bitrate and to remove sounds that are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass is compensated, providing the improved performance of the overall sound system. Notes • The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is compatible with the PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz) and the analog 2channel input sources. • The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with any of the sound field programs. • When the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on while an incompatible input source is being played back, “Not Available” appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. • When the input source is changed to an incompatible input source while the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on, the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is automatically turned off and the incompatible input source is played back in 2-channel or 6-channel stereo. y The ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display when one of the Compressed Music Enhancer modes is selected. 36 USING AUDIO FEATURES 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press ENHANCER on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired Compressed Music Enhancer mode. The following display is shown in the OSD and the ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display. AMP ENHANCER SOURCE 0 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 23) as the input source. Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display. TV MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH IN or MUSIC ENHANCER Front panel 2ch Stereo . LOW >HIGH Remote control ENHANCER Lights up Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” disappears from the front panel display. Note When you select “Off ”, this unit returns to the previously selected sound field program. 2 Press j / i on the remote control to select the desired effect level. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Choices: HIGH, LOW • Select “HIGH” for a high effect level. • Select “LOW” for a low effect level. Note Set the effect level to “HIGH” or “LOW” according to the characteristics of a source. The high-frequency signals of some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, se the effect level to “LOW”. 37 BASIC OPERATION Choices: 2ch Stereo, 6ch Stereo, Off • Select “2ch Stereo” to play back compression artifacts in 2-channel stereo. • Select “6ch Stereo” to play back compression artifacts in 6.1-channel stereo. • Select “Off ” to turn off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode. MULTI CH INPUT USING AUDIO FEATURES Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STEREO on the remote control repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”. Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound The “DIRECT STEREO” mode allows sources to bypass the decoders and DSP processors of this unit so that you can enjoy pure hi-fi sound from 2-channel PCM and analog sources. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press DIRECT ST. on the remote control to select “DIRECT STEREO”. AMP STEREO AMP SOURCE 1 DIRECT ST. SOURCE TV 8 TV 2ch Stereo DIRECT STEREO y • You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 79). • You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the PROGRAM selector on the front panel. Enjoying unprocessed input sources When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STRAIGHT on the remote control to select “STRAIGHT”. AMP STRAIGHT SOURCE ENT. TV EFFECT STRAIGHT 2 To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press STRAIGHT on the remote control again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. The sound effect is turned back on. y You can also select the “STRAIGHT” mode by pressing STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel. 38 Notes • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play CDs encoded in DTS when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode is selected. • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. When “DTS” is selected as the input mode (see page 34), no sound will be output. • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • “TONE CONTROL” (see page 32) and “SOUND MENU” (see page 78) settings (except for speaker level settings) are not effective. • The front panel display automatically dims. y You can also select the “DIRECT STEREO” mode by rotating the PROGRAM selector on the front panel. USING VIDEO FEATURES USING VIDEO FEATURES Signal format FORMAT Signal format display. When this unit cannot detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. Display status: Analog, Digital, Dolby D, DTS, PCM, --- Displaying the input source information You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. 1 Note Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. “---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals. Sampling frequency SAMPLING The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. Display status: 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 64kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz, --- AMP SET MENU SOURCE MENU SRCH MODE TV Note SET MENU Channel CHANNEL The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. .;BASICSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Note 2 Press d repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press ENTER. The following information about the input source appears in the OSD. PRESET/CH “---” appears when there is no source channel available. Bit rate BITRATE The number of bits passing a given point per second. Note PRESET/CH “---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate. ENTER A-E/CAT. Flag FLAG Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. ;SIGNAL INFO FORMAT PCM SAMPLING 48kHz CHANNEL 2/0/--BITRATE --FLAG NONE A-E/CAT. 3 Press SET MENU on the remote control again to exit from “SET MENU”. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE 39 BASIC OPERATION “---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling frequency. USING VIDEO FEATURES Selecting the OSD mode You can display the operating information of this unit on a video monitor. If you display the “SET MENU” and sound field program parameter settings on a video monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is to read the information in the front panel display. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press DISPLAY on the remote control repeatedly to toggle between the OSD modes. The OSD mode changes in the following order. AMP SOURCE DISPLAY TV Full display y You can display a gray background in the OSD when there is not video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 86). Notes • The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT jacks and will not be recorded. • You must set “VIDEO CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON” (see page 85) to display the OSD. • To display the OSD with the component video signals output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, set the OSD mode to the full display mode. • When “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “OFF” (see page 86), the OSD may not be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the picture. Playing video sources in the background You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Press the input selector buttons on the remote control to select a video source and then an audio source. Short display MD CD CD-R SLEEP XM MULTI CH IN CBL DVD Display off Short display Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. Display off No information is displayed except for the “SET MENU” screen. P02 . MUSIC Pop/Rock DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;21ms P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;25ms S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 Full display 40 P02 MUSIC Pop/Rock Short display TUNER Video sources V-AUX Full display Fully shows the sound field program parameter settings as well as the contents of the front panel display. DTV Audio sources DVR Note If you want to enjoy an audio source input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 37). ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Enjoying multi-channel sources in surround If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature to enjoy 6.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press EXTD SUR. on the remote control repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1-channel playback. Decoders You can select from the following decoders depending on the format of the source you are playing. Decoder Functions Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals PLIIxMusic in 6.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder. EX Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. AMP EXTD SUR. SOURCE 7 Off OFF Decoders are not used to create 6.1 channels. Notes 2 Press j / i repeatedly to select a decoder while “PLIIxMusic” (etc.) is displayed. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Auto AUTO When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back the signal in 6.1 channels. If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1 channels. • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing these kinds of discs in 6.1 channels, select a decoder manually from “PLIIx Music”, “EX/ES” or “EX”. • 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press EXTD SUR. in the following cases: – when “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 79) or “SUR. B SP” (see page 79) is set to “NONE”. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is being played. – when the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. – when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – when the “2ch Stereo” (see page 38) or “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 38) mode is selected. • When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to “AUTO”. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 79). 41 BASIC OPERATION TV ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multi-channels. 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to switch between the “SUR. STANDARD” and “SUR. ENHANCED” programs or press MOVIE to select the “MOVIE THEATER” program. SUR. STANDARD Functions PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie sources PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music sources PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game sources PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie sources PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game sources Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music sources Neural Sur. Neural Surround processing for any sources (U.S.A. and Canada models only) SUR. ENHANCED or MOVIE THEATER Functions STANDARD 5 AMP SOURCE or TV MOVIE 4 2 Press SELECT on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired decoder. SELECT 6 You can select from the following modes depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. y You can also select a decoder by pressing j / i on the remote control while the decoder type is displayed in the front panel display. PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie sources PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie sources Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources Notes • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 79). • The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with the PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz) and the analog 2channel input sources. • The Neural Surround decoder is not effective with any of the sound field programs. • When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surround-incompatible PCM signals are played back in stereo. 42 ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Using Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. If you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 79), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 64). Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 79) in the following cases: – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 37). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. – when the “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 38) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 38) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 38). BASIC OPERATION 43 RECORDING RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. CAUTION The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. Notes • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 32), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 80) and the sound field programs (see page 64) do not affect the recorded material. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN or PORTABLE jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. • The XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only) signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. • The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. (U.S.A. model) VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL 1 Turn on all the connected components. 2 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the source component you want to record from. TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L NEXT SEARCH MODE ON DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA MD SLEEP INPUT CD 2 POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER MD 2 DVD DTV MULTI CH IN V-AUX DVR TUNER TRANSMIT POWER CD XM CBL or CODE SET CD-R CD-R SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV V-AUX DVR TV VOL TV CH Front panel XM Remote control TUNER AMP SOURCE 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 4 Start recording on the recording component. VOLUME TV (U.S.A. model) 44 FM/AM TUNING FM/AM TUNING There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. Note Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception. Automatic tuning 3 Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L (U.S.A. model) DISPLAY VOLUME MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L NEXT SEARCH MODE ON LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE DVR MULTI CH INPUT V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R 1 CD XM VOLUME SP A A 3 2 MD/CD-R pTUNER AUTO TUNED PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 4 1 3 dB AM 1440 kHz No colon (:) L R Lights up If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. PRESET/TUNING EDIT INPUT SEARCH MODE 4 Front panel 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. • Press h to tune into a higher frequency. • Press l to tune into a lower frequency. FM/AM FM or AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD AUTO TUNED XM VOLUME SP A A dB AM 1530 kHz L R Lights up 45 BASIC OPERATION ZONE 2 ON/OFF FM/AM TUNING Manual tuning 3 If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L Note DISPLAY Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. (U.S.A. model) DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD TUNED XM VOLUME SP A A VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL dB AM 1440 kHz L R TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L NEXT SEARCH MODE ON LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY No colon (:) OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R PORTABLE If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 3 2 1 4 1 3 PRESET/TUNING EDIT Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. INPUT SEARCH MODE 4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue searching. l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL Front panel 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM FM 46 or AM FM/AM TUNING Automatic preset tuning 3 You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. (U.S.A. model) MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL Flash MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L NEXT SEARCH MODE ON DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE DVR MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER AUTO TUNED PORTABLE EFFECT CD MEMORY A1:FM 87.5 MHz 2 VOLUME 13 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. dB L R Flashes When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. y You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower frequencies. For details, see “Automatic preset tuning options” on page 48. INPUT Notes Front panel 2 Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception band. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM FM • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for all the available stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on page 48. 47 BASIC OPERATION 1 XM SP A SILENT CINEMA FM/AM TUNING ■ Automatic preset tuning options You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower frequencies. Note Manual preset tuning You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. First carry out steps 1 through 3 in “Automatic preset tuning” on page 47. (U.S.A. model) • Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING/ CH l / h to select the preset station number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning stops when stations have all been stored up to E8. A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY LEVEL VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L NEXT SEARCH MODE ON DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA NEXT • Press PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel display and then press PRESET/TUNING/CH l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. A/B/C/D/E ZONE CONTROL 3 4 1 2,5 Tune into a station automatically or manually. See pages 45 and 46 for tuning instructions. DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD XM VOLUME TUNED SP A PRESET/TUNING EDIT l PRESET/TUNING/CH h SEARCH MODE LEVEL A dB AM 630 kHz L R When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. 2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM MEMORY Flashes 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset station group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E NEXT CATEGORY Flashes DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD MEMORY XM VOLUME SP A C :AM Preset station Colon (:) group 48 dB 630 kHz L R FM/AM TUNING 4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. • Press h to select a higher preset station number. • Press l to select a lower preset station number. Selecting preset stations You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. (U.S.A. model) l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER Flashes PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L NEXT SEARCH MODE ON LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD AUDIO R PORTABLE SILENT CINEMA VOLUME SP A dB C3:AM 630 kHz L R 1 2 Preset station number STEREO 5 L EFFECT XM MEMORY MEMORY ENTERTAIN MOVIE 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE 1 BASIC OPERATION Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front panel display. MUSIC 1 STANDARD ENTER A-E/CAT. 2 A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY REC (U.S.A. model) y MAN'L/AUTO FM When performing this operation with the remote control, set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD TUNED 1 XM VOLUME SP A C3:AM dB 630 kHz L R The displayed station has been stored as C3. 6 Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or A-E/ CAT. j / i on the remote control) to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other stations. PRESET/CH A/B/C/D/E Notes or NEXT ENTER CATEGORY • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. A-E/CAT. Front panel A-E/CAT. Remote control 49 FM/AM TUNING 2 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. (U.S.A. model) PRESET/CH VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT l PRESET/TUNING/CH h FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L NEXT SEARCH MODE ON DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM or INPUT MAIN ZONE ENTER PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF LEVEL A-E/CAT. DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD TUNED E1:FM 87.5 MHz 2,4 PORTABLE 1,3 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. See “Selecting preset stations” on page 49. 2 Press and hold EDIT for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. VOLUME dB L R 1 XM SP A AUDIO SILENT CINEMA Remote control Front panel L EFFECT A-E/CAT. R PRESET/TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE Flashes DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD MEMORY XM VOLUME SP A E1:FM 87.5 MHz Flashes 50 dB L R FM/AM TUNING 3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. See “Selecting preset stations” on page 49. A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY LEVEL NEXT Flashes DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD XM VOLUME MEMORY SP A dB A5:FM 90.6 MHz L R Flashes BASIC OPERATION 4 Press EDIT again. “EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. PRESET/TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD XM VOLUME SP A EDIT dB E1-A5 L R 51 XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM Satellite Radio is the satellite radio service with millions of listeners across the United States, broadcasting live daily. The XM Satellite Radio channel lineup includes more than 150 digital channels of choice from coast to coast: 67 commercial-free music channels, featuring hip hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33 channels of premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels of the traffic and weather information for major metropolitan areas nationwide. Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you will need to set up an account and activate service with XM using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio” on page 54. For further information on XM Satellite Radio services, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com/”. This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) that plays back the surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience. Notes • The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii). • XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory and monthly subscription are sold separately. For details, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com/”. • For information on obtaining the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com/” or consult your local retailer that sells XM Ready products. • To ensure the optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory must be placed at or near a southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. ■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc. Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold separately. Premium Channel available at additional monthly cost. Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL”. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling “1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)”. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com. Only available in the 48 continuous United States. © 2005 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Connecting the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory Connect the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory. XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory (sold separately) (U.S.A. model) XM 52 XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM Satellite Radio controls and functions Note The following controls are available only when “XM” is selected as the input source. Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. ■ Front panel functions ■ Remote control functions (U.S.A. model) PRESET/TUNING EDIT CODE SET FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TV AV STANDBY POWER SLEEP MD AUTO/MAN'L NEXT SEARCH MODE POWER TUNING MODE DISPLAY INPUT 1 CD TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 TRANSMIT POWER CD-R XM DVD DTV V-AUX DVR 2 MULTI CH IN CBL 10 TUNER STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND EFFECT AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV 1 2 3 4 5 2 CATEGORY (All Channel Search mode) Changes the channel category while staying in the All Channel Search mode. (Category Search mode) Changes the channel category. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset channel group (A to E). 3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (All Channel Search mode) Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold for quick search. (Category Search mode) Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press and hold for quick search. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8). 4 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 60). 5 DISPLAY Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD (see page 61). 3 4 5 6 ENTER A-E/CAT. RETURN A-E/CAT. DISPLAY XM MEMORY 7 REC Set to SOURCE. (U.S.A. model) 1 XM Selects “XM” as the input source. 2 Numeric buttons (All Channel Search or Category Search mode) Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly. (Preset Search mode) Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly. 3 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i (All Channel Search mode) Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the channel category. Press PRESET/CH u / d to search for a channel within all channels. Press and hold for quick search. (Category Search mode) Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the channel category. Press PRESET/CH u / d to search for a channel within the selected category. Press and hold for quick search. (Preset Search mode) Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the preset channel group (A to E). Press PRESET/CH u / d to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). 4 XM MEMORY Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 60). 5 ENT. Confirms an entered channel number in the Direct Number Access mode (see page 59). 6 SRCH MODE Changes the search mode between the All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 56). 7 DISPLAY Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD (see page 61). 53 BASIC OPERATION 1 SEARCH MODE Changes the search mode between the All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 56). ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH SPEAKERS A B MOVIE XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Activating XM Satellite Radio 2 To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required. Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and then visit the website at “http://activate.xmradio.com/” or call “1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” with a major credit card handy for signing up. Check the XM Satellite Radio reception level and adjust the orientation of the XM Connectand-Play digital antenna accessory for a better percentage of the reception level. y You can display the XM Satellite Radio reception level by using the “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 87). (U.S.A. model) Notes • If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display, the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory may not be connected to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit properly. See “Connecting the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory” on page 52 and check the connection. • The “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 87) cannot be adjusted by using the remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory connected to the XM jack of this unit for a better percentage of the reception level. VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L NEXT SEARCH MODE ON DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 3 1 1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in the front panel display. 3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) to select channel “0”. PRESET/CH INPUT l PRESET/TUNING/CH h or ENTER LEVEL A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Front panel Front panel or AMP Note SOURCE XM You cannot select channel “0” if the All Channel Search mode (see page 56) is not selected. TV Remote control 4 Lights up DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME SP A XM RADIO 54 Remote control dB L R Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number displayed in the front panel display and write it down. ID:_____________________________________ XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Basic XM Satellite Radio operations TV AV CD CD-R XM DVD DTV V-AUX DVR TV VOL TV CH • You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels (see page 42). • You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see page 60). • You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display or in the OSD (see page 61). MULTI CH IN CBL TUNER AMP SOURCE VOLUME TV TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN Search for a channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. See “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio search mode” on page 56 for details. y SLEEP MD 1 2 1 MOVIE (U.S.A. model) 1 BASIC OPERATION Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control to select “XM” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel appears in the front panel display. AMP SOURCE XM TV Remote control Lights up DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME SP A [001] Preview dB L R y When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. Note The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. 55 XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Selecting the XM Satellite Radio search mode 2 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. You can search for the desired channel using one of the three search modes (All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes). You can also enter the channel number directly to select the desired channel by using the Direct Number Access mode (see page 59). PRESET/TUNING EDIT SET MENU or MENU SRCH MODE SEARCH MODE Front panel Remote control ■ All Channel Search mode (U.S.A. model) DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME SP A MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM dB ALL CH SEARCH VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL L R TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L NEXT SEARCH MODE ON DISPLAY 3 OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 2 TV 3 4 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly to change the channel category. 1 PRESET/CH AV A/B/C/D/E MD 1 CD CD-R SLEEP XM DTV V-AUX DVR MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 or NEXT MULTI CH IN CBL DVD STEREO TUNER STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENTER CATEGORY A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. ENT. EFFECT AMP PRESET/CH LEVEL SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV 1 TITLE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE BAND ENTER A-E/CAT. TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE A-E/CAT. RETURN 2 3-4 DISPLAY XM MEMORY STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE REC (U.S.A. model) 1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. Front panel 4 Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. PRESET/CH l PRESET/TUNING/CH h or ENTER LEVEL A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. INPUT Front panel Remote control y You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control). Front panel or AMP SOURCE XM TV Remote control 56 XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Category Search mode 2 (U.S.A. model) Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL PRESET/TUNING EDIT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L SET MENU NEXT SEARCH MODE ON PROGRAM MENU or DISPLAY OFF INPUT SRCH MODE MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE SEARCH MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT Front panel SILENT CINEMA 2 TV 3 4 MD 1 CD CD-R SLEEP XM MULTI CH IN CBL DVD V-AUX 1 DVR AV DTV STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. STANDARD TUNER DVR 6 7 8 ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 PRESET/CH LEVEL SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV 1 TITLE MENU SRCH MODE ENTER TV INPUT MUTE A-E/CAT. RETURN DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME dB L R ENT. SET MENU BAND A-E/CAT. TV MUTE DTV/CBL CAT SEARCH EFFECT AMP V-AUX SP A DIRECT ST. 5 SPEAKERS Remote control 2 3-4 3 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly to change the channel category. DISPLAY XM MEMORY STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE (U.S.A. model) A/B/C/D/E 1 or NEXT Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Remote control Front panel 4 INPUT ENTER CATEGORY Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. Front panel PRESET/CH or AMP l PRESET/TUNING/CH h SOURCE or XM ENTER LEVEL A-E/CAT. TV A-E/CAT. Remote control Front panel Remote control y You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control). 57 BASIC OPERATION PRESET/CH REC XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Preset Search mode Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels” on page 60. 2 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. PRESET/TUNING EDIT y SET MENU or All preset channels (A1 to E8) recalls “001 Preview” by the initial factory setting. MENU SRCH MODE SEARCH MODE Front panel Remote control (U.S.A. model) DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL VOLUME SP A MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L SEARCH MODE ON LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM dB PRESET SEARCH NEXT L R INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 3 2 TV AV CD CD-R 3 4 SLEEP STEREO 1 2 3 4 MULTI CH IN STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 MD 1 XM CBL DVD V-AUX DTV 1 TUNER DVR MUSIC ENTERTAIN 10 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly to change the preset channel group (A to E). MOVIE PRESET/CH A/B/C/D/E ENT. EFFECT AMP PRESET/CH LEVEL SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV 1 SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE ENTER A-E/CAT. TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN A-E/CAT. RETURN 2 3-4 ENTER CATEGORY A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. DISPLAY Remote control Front panel XM MEMORY MOVIE or NEXT REC (U.S.A. model) 4 1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). PRESET/CH INPUT l PRESET/TUNING/CH h or LEVEL Front panel Front panel ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Remote control or y AMP SOURCE XM TV Remote control 58 You can also select the preset channel number directly by pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control. XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Direct Number Access mode TV MD 1 3 AV CD-R CD SLEEP XM MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV V-AUX DVR MUSIC STEREO 3 ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 TUNER 3 2 ENT. 10 EFFECT AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV PRESET/CH 1 LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND ENTER A-E/CAT. TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN Press the numeric buttons on the remote control to enter the desired three-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the numeric buttons as shown below. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY MOVIE REC (U.S.A. model) 1 The display changes as follows. DVR Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control to select “XM” as the input source. V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME SP A dB <XM> --1 L R AMP SOURCE DVR XM DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME dB <XM> -12 Press SRCH MODE on the remote control repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD L MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM R VOLUME SP A dB <XM>123 L R SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME SP A dB ALL CH SEARCH L R or DVR Press the numeric buttons and ENT. on the remote control to enter the desired one-digit or two-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 12, press the numeric buttons as shown below. V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM MUSIC 1 2 STRAIGHT ENT. EFFECT VOLUME SP A CAT SEARCH STEREO dB L R y • Instead of pressing ENT. to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. • If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel number. • Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons or ENT. cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure. 59 BASIC OPERATION 2 V-AUX SP A TV XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels 2 You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 58. Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM MEMORY on the remote control). The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM or RETURN XM MEMORY Front panel Remote control (U.S.A. model) VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L ZONE CONTROL MEMORY NEXT SEARCH MODE ON LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY Flashes OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Note 3 4 STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel display. 2,5 3 ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE BAND 3-4 ENTER A-E/CAT. 2,5 A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY REC (U.S.A. model) Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly to select a preset channel group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel group letter appears in the front panel display. PRESET/CH 1 Search for a channel you want to set as a preset channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. See “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio search mode” on page 56 for details. A/B/C/D/E or NEXT CATEGORY ENTER A-E/CAT. Remote control Front panel DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME SP A [040] Deep Tra A-E/CAT. dB L Flashes R DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R CD pXM TUNER MEMORY Currently selected channel number C dB [040] Deep Currently selected preset channel group 60 VOLUME SP A L R XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING 4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) repeatedly to select a preset channel number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel number appears in the front panel display. Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD. (U.S.A. model) PRESET/CH l PRESET/TUNING/CH h VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF or ZONE CONTROL ENTER LEVEL A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L NEXT SEARCH MODE ON LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Front panel Remote control Flashes DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R DISPLAY CD pXM TUNER MEMORY VOLUME dB C5 [040] Deep L TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. R Currently selected preset channel number 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE BAND 5 MOVIE BASIC OPERATION SP A ENTER Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM MEMORY on the remote control) to set the selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a preset channel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off in the front panel display. MEMORY RETURN XM MEMORY Front panel Remote control DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME SP A C5:[040] Deep A-E/CAT. DISPLAY DISPLAY REC (U.S.A. model) Note If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 104 for appropriate remedies. ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display MAN'L/AUTO FM or A-E/CAT. RETURN XM MEMORY Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the remote control repeatedly to toggle between the following XM Satellite Radio information display modes. dB L R TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L Channel number / name Colon (:) Note Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in the same preset channel group and number is cleared. DISPLAY Front panel or Channel category DISPLAY Remote control Artist name / Song title 61 XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING When the channel number / name is displayed: DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME SP A dB [040] Deep Tra L R ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information in the OSD Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the remote control. The following screen is displayed in the OSD. When the channel category is displayed: TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY or DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM DISPLAY VOLUME SP A Front panel dB <CAT>Rock L When the artist name / song title is displayed: DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM Coldplay / Clo XM INFORMATION dB L R p y • The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by using the “SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 87). • If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with an underscore “_”. Note If you press DISPLAY while the XM Satellite Radio information display is scrolling from right to left in the front panel display, the XM Satellite Radio information display mode toggles as described above. 62 p ALL CH SEARCH XM :040 CHAN :Deep Tracks CAT :Rock NAME :Coldplay TITLE :Clocks .( Coldplay / Clo ) []/[]:CHANNEL [<]/[>]:CATEGORY VOLUME SP A Remote control R y • You can select the amount of time while the XM Satellite Radio information is displayed in the OSD by using the “XM DISPLAY” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 87). • To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in the OSD. • The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released if you press ENTER on the remote control again or if you change the XM Satellite Radio channel. • This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM Satellite Radio information screens, press TITLE on the remote control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio information screen is being on hold. SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument. Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. Selecting sound field programs • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 37). • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs are applied. ■ Front panel operations ■ Remote control operations (U.S.A. model) AMP AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE AUTO/MAN'L STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN DISPLAY 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. TUNING MODE NEXT SEARCH MODE ON MOVIE OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R PORTABLE 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 Sound field program selector buttons EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 10 ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH (U.S.A. model) PROGRAM selector Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control repeatedly. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. 63 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Notes SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field program descriptions This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” (see page 34) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. Notes • The DSP sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself. ■ For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel stereo sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc. y Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 63). Remote control button Features 1 STEREO 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels or plays back 2-channel sources as they are. 2 MUSIC Pop/Rock CINEMA DSP processing. Creates an enthusiastic atmosphere where you can feel as if you are in an actual jazz or rock concert. ENTERTAINMENT TV Sports CINEMA DSP processing. Reproduces the sound environment of a large concert hall using the surround sound field to enhance your experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. ENTERTAINMENT Mono Movie CINEMA DSP processing. Reproduces monaural video sources (such as old movies) at the optimum reverberation level to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. ENTERTAINMENT Game CINEMA DSP processing. Adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. 3 64 Sound field program Sources MULTI 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Remote control button Sound field program Features MOVIE THEATER Spectacle CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS, especially large-scale movie productions. MOVIE THEATER Sci-Fi CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS in a virtual-space sound field employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER Adventure CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films similar to the sound field of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER General CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces sounds from 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films characterized by soft and extensive sound field. SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for the selected decoder. SUR. ENHANCED Enhanced processing for the selected decoder. 4 Sources MULTI 2-CH 5 ■ For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. y Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 63). Sound field program Features STEREO 2ch Stereo Plays back 2-channel sources. STEREO 6ch Stereo Plays back 2-channel sources from all speakers in 6.1 channels, providing a larger sound field ideal for background music at parties, etc. MUSIC Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP processing. The program reproduces a classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. MUSIC The Bttm Line HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club where 300 people can be seated. MUSIC The Roxy Thtr HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the dynamic rock music environment of “The Roxy Theatre”, one of the hottest rock clubs in L.A.The listener’s imaginary seat is at the center-left of the hall. ENTERTAINMENT Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city to create a highly concentrated and energetic sound. SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for the selected decoder. SUR. ENHANCED Enhanced processing for the selected decoder. 2-CH 1 2 3 Sources MULTI 2-CH 5 65 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Remote control button SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Changing sound field parameter settings 2 Turn on the video monitor and then press DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display is shown in the OSD. You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory settings. Although you do not have to change the initial factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. DISPLAY Notes • Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group (see page 86). • When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the sound field parameter name in the OSD. • You cannot change the sound field parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 86). If you want to change the sound field parameter values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. Sound field program category P02 Cursor MUSIC . Pop/Rock DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;21ms P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;25ms S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 Sound field parameters Sound field parameter values y • For details about the function and control range of each sound field parameter, see page 67. • Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field program parameter settings. • The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD. In this case, press u / d to scroll through pages. • If you press and hold j / i to change the sound field parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the front panel display. CODE SET POWER TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. 3 Press one of the sound field program selector buttons repeatedly to select the desired sound field program you want to adjust. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER STANDARD MD SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV V-AUX DVR 3 DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 XM 10 ENT. EFFECT ENT. TUNER EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL 1 SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE AMP ENTER SOURCE TV VOL TV CH A-E/CAT. VOLUME RETURN TV A-E/CAT. DISPLAY XM MEMORY REC 4 2 AUDIO (U.S.A. model) 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP. 4 Press u / d to select the desired sound field parameter and then j / i to change the selected sound field parameter value. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. PRESET/CH AMP SOURCE TV ENTER A-E/CAT. 66 A-E/CAT. SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS ■ Sound field parameter descriptions You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. y To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 66 for details. Sound field parameter DSP LEVEL Features DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delay. Changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY) 1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY) Source sound Level Level Early reflections Level INIT.DLY P.INIT.DLY S.INIT.DLY SB INI.DLY Time Time Time Delay Delay Delay SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound source Reflection face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms 67 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter ROOM SIZE P.ROOM SIZE S.ROOM SIZE SB ROOM SIZE Features Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room. Control range: 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early reflections Level Level Level Source sound Time Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 LIVENESS S.LIVENESS SB LIVENESS Large value = 2.0 Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room. Control range: 0 to 10 Source sound Time Small reflected sound Small value = 0 68 Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large reflected sound Large value = 10 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter REV.TIME Features Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s Reverberation Source sound Reverberation Early reflections 60 dB REV.TIME Sound source 60 dB REV.TIME Short reverberation REV.TIME Long reverberation Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment. Control range: 0 to 250 ms SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Level REV.DELAY 60 dB Source sound REV. LEVEL Time 69 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter REV.LEVEL Features Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Level Control range: 0 to 100% Source sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY 2ch Stereo DIRECT REV.TIME 2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources. Choices: AUTO, OFF y • The “AUTO” setting bypasses the decoders and DSP processors only when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 32). • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases: – “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 79). – “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 78) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see page 79). 6ch Stereo CT LEVEL SL LEVEL SR LEVEL SB LEVEL 70 6-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right and surround back levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 6-channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 to 100% SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter Features PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music PANORAMA Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music DIMENSION Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Choices: OFF, ON Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front) Initial setting: STD (standard) PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music CENTER WIDTH Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) Initial setting: 3 DTS Neo:6 Music C.IMAGE DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. Control range: 0.0 to 1.0 Initial setting: 0.3 y 71 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS The “PRO LOGIC IIx Music”, “PRO LOGIC II Music”, and “DTS Neo:6 Music” parameters can be set only when “SUR. STANDARD” is selected. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to select “SUR. STANDARD” (see page 42). SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field program speaker layouts Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the table below to understand the speaker layout for each sound field program. Note Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back. Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as special sound effects, etc. y Except for “2ch Stereo”, “6ch Stereo”, and “STRAIGHT”, you can select a decoder to output sound from the surround back speaker (see page 41). The abbreviations and symbols used in each diagram are as follows: L Front left speaker SL Surround left speaker C Center speaker SR Surround right speaker R Front right speaker SB Surround back speaker Speaker from which sound is being output * Speaker from which no sound is being output When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are turned off in the front panel display Sound field program 2-channel audio (monaural) STEREO 2ch Stereo L SL STEREO 6ch Stereo L SL MUSIC Hall in Vienna The Bttm Line The Roxy Thtr ENTERTAINMENT Disco MUSIC Pop/Rock ENTERTAINMENT TV Sports Mono Movie Game 72 L SL L SL C SB C SB C SB C SB 2-channel audio (stereo) R L SR SL R L SR SL R L SR SL R L SR SL C SB C SB C SB C SB 5.1/6.1-channel audio * R L SR SL R L SR SL R L SR SL R L SR SL C SB C SB C SB C SB R SR R SR R SR R SR SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field program MOVIE THEATER Spectacle Sci-Fi Adventure General 2-channel audio (monaural) L SL SUR. STANDARD DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DTS L SL C SB R L SR SL R L SR SL C SB 2-channel audio (stereo) Pro Logic SUR. STANDARD PLII Movie PLII Music PLII Game PLIIx Movie PLIIx Music PLIIx Game L SL C SB C SB R L SR SL R L SR SL C SB 5.1/6.1-channel audio * C SB C SB R SR R SR Pro Logic R L SR SL Pro Logic II/Pro Logic IIx C SB R SR Pro Logic II L SB R SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS SL C SR Pro Logic IIx SUR. STANDARD Neo:6 Cinema Neo:6 Music L SL C SB R L SR SL Cinema L SL C SB C SB R SR Cinema/Music R SR Music SUR. STANDARD Neural Sur. L SL C SB R L SR SL C SB R SR 73 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field program SUR. ENHANCED DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DTS 2-channel audio (monaural) L SL C SB 2-channel audio (stereo) R L SR SL Pro Logic SUR. ENHANCED PLII Movie PLIIx Movie L SL C SB C SB 5.1/6.1-channel audio * R L SR SL C SB R SR Pro Logic R L SR SL C SB R SR Pro Logic II L SL C SB R SR Pro Logic IIx SUR. ENHANCED Neo:6 Cinema L SL C SB R L SR SL R L SR SL C SB R SR STRAIGHT L SL C SB C SB R L SR SL Monaural playback DIRECT STEREO L SL C SB R L SR SL Monaural playback 74 C SB R SR C SB R SR SET MENU SET MENU You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Basic setup BASIC SETUP Use this feature to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort (see page 28). ■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Parameter Features Page A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the crossover frequency. 78 B)SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 80 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 81 D)CENTER GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 81 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 81 F)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 82 G)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings. 82 Input menu 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. Features Page A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used. 83 B)INPUT MODE Selects the initial input mode of the source. 84 C)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 84 D)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 85 75 ADVANCED OPERATION Parameter SET MENU Option menu 3 OPTION MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters. Parameter Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. 85 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings. 86 C)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 86 D)MULTI ZONE SET Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. 87 E)XM RADIO SET Displays the current reception level of the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory or adjusts the XM Satellite Radio information display settings. 87 Note The “XM RADIO SET” parameter is only applicable to the U.S.A. model. ■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 39). 76 SET MENU Using SET MENU 2 Press u / d to select “MANUAL SETUP”. Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. TV AV CD CD-R MUSIC STEREO MD SLEEP 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. TUNER DVR 10 [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p V-AUX MOVIE 1 STANDARD p MULTI CH IN DTV SET MENU ;BASICSETUP .;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO XM CBL DVD ENTERTAIN PRESET/CH ENT. EFFECT 1 AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE BAND VOLUME TV ENTER A-E/CAT. TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN A-E/CAT. RETURN 1,7 2-6 DISPLAY 3 XM MEMORY REC MOVIE (U.S.A. model) Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”. The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the OSD. y ;MANUAL SETUP PRESET/CH ENTER You cannot change some “SET MENU” parameters when “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected as the night listening mode (see page 33). A-E/CAT. []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press u / d repeatedly and then press ENTER to select and enter the desired menu. The following displays are examples where “SOUND MENU” is selected. PRESET/CH 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. p A-E/CAT. 4 Note .1SOUNDMENU 2INPUTMENU 3OPTIONMENU p • You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. • If you press one of the sound field program selector buttons during the “SET MENU” operation, the “SET MENU” operation is canceled. • Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each parameter setting. • Press RETURN to return to the previous menu level. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. AMP SET MENU MENU 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 1 SOUND MENU 2/2 ADVANCED OPERATION SOURCE SRCH MODE TV p .E)LFE LEVEL F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p SET MENU p p .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)CENTER GEQ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter .;BASICSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 77 SET MENU 5 Press u / d repeatedly and then press ENTER to select and enter the desired submenu. The following display is an example where “SPEAKER LEVEL” is selected. PRESET/CH Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 PRESET/CH ENTER p A-E/CAT. 1 SOUND MENU 2/2 .E)LFE LEVEL F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p A-E/CAT. p A-E/CAT. .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)CENTER GEQ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p ENTER A-E/CAT. 1 SOUND MENU ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings. -__________+ .FL;;;;;;;;;; FR;;;;;;;;;; C;;;;;;;;;; y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE 6 Press u / d to select the desired parameter and then j / i to change the parameter settings. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. PRESET/CH 7 SMALL>LARGE PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. FRONT SP ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. SET MENU • Select “SMALL” (small) if you have small front speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 79). • Select “LARGE” (large) if you have large front speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the front left and right channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. MENU SRCH MODE Note Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. 78 If “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 79), the LFE signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting. SET MENU Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG CENTER SP Surround back speakers SUR. B SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG SUR. B SP NONE>SML LRG NONE>SMLLRG • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a center speaker. The low-frequency signals of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/ BASS OUT”, and the rest of the center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. • Select “SML” (small) if you have a small center speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/ BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large center speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All the center channel signals are directed to the center speaker. Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a surround back speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”, and the rest of the surround back channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. • Select “SML” (small) if you have a small surround back speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large surround back speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround back channel signals are directed to the surround back speaker. Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH SUR. L/R SP LFE/BASS OUT NONE>SMLLRG SWFRFRNT>BOTH • Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” are directed to the subwoofer. • Select “FRNT” (front) if you did not connect a subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 78). • Select “BOTH” (both) if you connected a subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” are directed to the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 78). 79 ADVANCED OPERATION • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 43) and “SUR. B SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. The low-frequency signals of the surround left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “SML” (small) if you have small surround left and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have large surround left and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. SET MENU Crossover CROSS OVER Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 78 and 79). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 78 and 79). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz ■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 78). Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB Initial setting: 0 dB B)SPEAKER LEVEL -__________+ .FL;;;;;;;;;; FR;;;;;;;;;; C;;;;;;;;;; CROSS OVER FREQ;;;80Hz Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE 02ASUBWOOFER PHASE >NORMALREVERSE • Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. 80 • Select “FL” to adjust the balance of the front left speaker. • Select “FR” to adjust the balance of the front right speaker. • Select “C” to adjust the balance of the center speaker. • Select “SL” to adjust the balance of the surround left speaker. • Select “SR” to adjust the balance of the surround right speaker. • Select “SB” to adjust the balance of the surround back speaker. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer. Note “C”, “SL”, “SR”, “SB” and “SWFR” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 79), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 79), “SUR. B SP” (see page 79) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 79) are set to “NONE” respectively. SET MENU ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE ■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band (100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You can make adjustments while listening to the currently selected source component or a test tone. Control range: –6 to +6 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0 dB C)SP DISTANCE D)CENTER GEQ p Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft) [Other models]: meters (m) • Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters. • Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet. y Press u / d to select a frequency band and j / i to adjust the selected frequency band. ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL E)LFE LEVEL .SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Speaker SPEAKER Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 79), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. 81 ADVANCED OPERATION Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Control range: –20 to 0 dB Control step: 1 dB p Note “CENTER”, “SUR.L”, “SUR.R”, “SUR.B” and “SWFR” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 79), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 79), “SUR. B SP” (see page 79) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 79) are set to “NONE” respectively. Test tone TEST Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently selected source component. • Select “ON” to output test tones from the front left and center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the center speaker. p Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) • Select “FRONT L” to adjust the distance of the front left speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “FRONT R” to adjust the distance of the front right speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “CENTER” to adjust the distance of the center speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “SUR. L” to adjust the distance of the surround left speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “SUR. R” to adjust the distance of the surround right speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “SUR. B” to adjust the distance of the surround back speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • Select “SWFR” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB p .TEST>OFFON -______+ 100Hz ;;;;;; 300Hz ;;;;;; 1kHz ;;;;;; 3kHz ;;;;;; 10kHz ;;;;;; []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust p p . UNIT;;;;;;;;feet FRONTL;;;10.0ft FRONTR;;;10.0ft CENTER;;;;10.0ft []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust SET MENU ■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. ■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. G)AUDIO SET F)DYNAMIC RANGE p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p .SP:MINSTD>MAX HP:MINSTD>MAX .MUTING TYPE;FULL AUDIO DELAY;;0ms TONE BYPASS;AUTO p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Speaker SP Adjusts the speaker compression. Headphone HP Adjusts the headphone compression. Choices: MIN, STD, MAX • Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” (standard) for general use. • Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. Muting type MUTING TYPE Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 33). Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio output. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay AUDIO DELAY Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Control range: 0 to 160 ms Control step: 1 ms Tone bypass TONE BYPASS Use this feature to select whether audio output bypasses tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 32). Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” if you want signals to bypass tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible. • Select “OFF” if you do not want signals to bypass tone control circuitry. 82 SET MENU 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. 2 INPUTMENU p p .A)I/OASSIGNMENT B)INPUTMODE C)INPUTRENAME D)VOLUME TRIM []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4 OPTICAL IN (2) OPTICAL IN (3) OPTICAL IN (4) Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR (3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR (4) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR OPTICALIN ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C CMPNT-V INPUT [A] CMPNT-V INPUT [B] CMPNT-V INPUT [C] Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR [B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR [C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR CMPNT-VINPUT For COAXIAL INPUT jack 5 COAXIAL IN (5) Choices: (5) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR COAXIALIN .(5);;;;; ( DVD DVD ) Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 OPTICAL OUT (1) Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR OPTICALOUT .(1);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R ) 83 ADVANCED OPERATION .[A];;;;;DVD (DVD) [B];;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL) [C];;;;; DVR ( DVR ) .(2);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R) (3);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (4);;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL ) SET MENU ■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE Use this feature to set this unit to reset “INPUT MODE” back to “AUTO” (see page 34) regardless of the previous setting or to recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”, or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST 2 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press j / i on the remote control to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. PRESET/CH AMP SOURCE B)INPUTMODE ENTER TV A-E/CAT. >AUTOLAST A-E/CAT. [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return 3 • Select “AUTO” to reset “INPUT MODE” back to “AUTO” (see page 34) regardless of the previous setting whenever you turn on this unit. This unit automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals (2) Analog signals • Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”, or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on this unit. Press u / d to select the character you want to use and then press j / i to move to the next space. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. ■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME Notes Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press d to change the character in the following order, or press u to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) C)INPUTRENAME DVD-> DVD ________ 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each input source. 5 Press SET MENU on the remote control to exit from “INPUT RENAME”. 1 p p [<]/[>]:Position []/[]:Chara. Press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the input source you want to change the name of. MD CD CD-R SLEEP XM MULTI CH IN CBL 84 DVD DTV V-AUX DVR TUNER SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE SET MENU ■ Volume Trim D)VOLUME TRIM Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. 3 OPTIONMENU 1/2 3 OPTIONMENU 2/2 .E)XM RADIO SET p .A)DISPLAYSET B)MEMORYGUARD C)PARAM.INI D)MULTI ZONESET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p D)VOLUME TRIM DVD->0.0dB 3 OPTION MENU p Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET [<]/[>]:Adjust [RETURN]:Exit A)DISPLAYSET p p .DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 VIDEOCONV.;;;ON OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0 GRAY BACK;;;AUTO []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: – 4 to 0 Control step: 1 • Press j to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press i to make the front panel display brighter. Notes • The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are converted to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. • You must set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” to display the OSD. • Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”. 85 ADVANCED OPERATION Video conversion VIDEO CONV. Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to convert composite and S-video signals interchangeably and up-convert composite and S-video signals to component video signals. • Select “OFF” not to convert any signals. SET MENU OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward) Control step: 1 Initial setting: 0 • Press j to raise the position of the OSD. • Press i to lower the position of the OSD. Gray back GRAY BACK Use this feature to display a gray background in the OSD when there is no video signal being input. Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” to display a gray background in the OSD when there is no video signal being input. • Select “OFF” not to display any background in the OSD. ■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial factory settings. Press the corresponding sound field program selector buttons on the remote control to select the sound field program that you want to initialize. An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field program names that have been changed from their initial factory settings. Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER, STANDARD C)PARAM.INI Notes • Depending on the video signals being input or the system setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to “OFF”. • Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the picture. ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON B)MEMORYGUARD >OFFON [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature. • Select “ON” to protect: – DSP program parameters – all “SET MENU” items – all speaker levels Note When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other “SET MENU” items. 86 STEREO *MUSIC ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE THEATER *STANDARD Press DSP key Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON” (see page 86). SET MENU ■ Zone set D)MULTI ZONE SET Use this feature to specify the location of speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals of this unit. ■ XM Radio setting E)XM RADIO SET (U.S.A. model only) E)XM RADIO SET D)MULTI ZONESET .XM DISPLAY;;;10S XM ANTENNA;;NONE SCROLL;;;;;;CONT .SPB;;;;;;;FRONT [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return Speaker B setting SP B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B • Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main zone. • Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another zone. If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at the SPEAKERS B terminals only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the sound is output from both headphones and the SPEAKERS B terminals when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”. • If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 43). XM Radio information display time XM DISPLAY Use this feature to set the time to display the XM Satellite Radio information in the OSD after pressing DISPLAY on the front panel or on the remote control. Choices: ON, 10S, 30S, OFF • Select “ON” to display the XM Satellite Radio information while this unit is tuned into a channel. • Select “10S” to display the XM Satellite Radio information for 10 seconds. • Select “30S” to display the XM Satellite Radio information for 30 seconds. • Select “OFF” not to display the XM Satellite Radio information. XM Radio antenna XM ANTENNA Use this feature to check the current reception level of the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory connected to the XM jack of this unit (see page 52). For the best reception, orient the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory so that a value of 60% or more is displayed here. Display status: NONE, 0 to 100% Notes XM Radio information display scroll SCROLL Use this feature to set whether to display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once (see page 61). Choices: CONT, ONCE • Select “CONT” to display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a continuous manner. • Select “ONCE” to display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display by 14 alphanumeric characters at once. 87 ADVANCED OPERATION • “NONE” is displayed if the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory is not connected to this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see page 52). • The “XM ANTENNA” parameter cannot be adjusted by using the remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory connected to the XM jack of this unit for a better percentage of the reception level. ADVANCED SETUP ADVANCED SETUP This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • The settings you make are reflected next time you press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see page 27). • Only MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. (U.S.A. model) 3 VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY LEVEL MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L NEXT SEARCH MODE ON DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. See page 89 for a complete list of available parameters. PROGRAM 1-2,5 1 2,4 3 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. Currently selected parameter Currently selected parameter setting MASTER SP IMP.-8 MIN ON 2 OFF Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. STRAIGHT While holding down STRAIGHT EFFECT MASTER 5 EFFECT ON OFF Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. MASTER ON OFF y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. 88 ADVANCED SETUP ■ Speaker impedance SP IMP. Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN • Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω . SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.* 8ΩMIN Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. ■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 93). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “00001”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “00002”. Note You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library code for the remote control (see page 93). ■ Remote control TUNER ID REMOTE TUN Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 93). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “81916”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “81917”. Surround back Note If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. 6ΩMIN Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library code for the remote control (see page 93). ■ Remote control XM ID REMOTE XM (U.S.A. model only) Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 94). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID library code is set to “81918”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID library code is set to “81919”. Surround back Note The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems (A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8ΩMIN”. ■ Factory presets PRESET Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings (see page 100). Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. Notes You need to set the corresponding remote control XM library code for the remote control (see page 93). ■ Tuner frequency step TU (Asia and General models only) Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South America. • Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas. • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. 89 ADVANCED OPERATION * REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 92). Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. Set the component selector switch to TV to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for DTV/CBL or (see page 92). When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/ CBL and , priority is given to the one set for DTV/ CBL. CODE SET TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER MD SLEEP CD-R CD XM MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV V-AUX DVR TUNER CODE SET AMP *1 TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV CD CD-R SOURCE TV VOL TV CH STANDBY POWER MD VOLUME TV SLEEP XM MULTI CH IN CBL TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 *1 MOVIE DVD DTV V-AUX DVR TV VOL TV CH TUNER AMP SPEAKERS ENHANCER 9 0 NIGHT 10 STRAIGHT TV ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH SOURCE VOLUME *2 TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 XM MEMORY SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT REC 9 0 LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE MOVIE ENTER A-E/CAT. RETURN A-E/CAT. DISPLAY 10 AUDIO ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH DISC SKIP LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE *2 ENTER A-E/CAT. RETURN A-E/CAT. DISPLAY XM MEMORY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP (U.S.A. model) Notes *1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the component selector switch position. *2 These buttons control this unit only when the component selector switch is set to AMP. (U.S.A. model) Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the component selector switch position. Remote control *2 90 Digital TV/Cable TV TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV CH +/– Changes the channel number. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. TV INPUT Changes the input source. These buttons control your TV only when the component selector switch is set to TV. For details, see the “Digital TV/ Cable TV” column on page 91. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Controlling other components Set the component selector switch to SOURCE to control other components selected with the input selector buttons, , or . You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 92). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button, , and . Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. U 1 CODE SET POWER TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD DTV V-AUX DVR TUNER AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH U MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. VOLUME 5 6 7 8 ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 3 4 5 TV INPUT MUTE MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE BAND 7 8 ENTER A-E/CAT. RETURN A-E/CAT. DISPLAY XM MEMORY 9 REC 6 TV MUTE ENT. EFFECT TV STEREO MOVIE SPEAKERS MULTI CH IN CBL DVD 2 SLEEP XM U STEREO AUDIO DISC SKIP (U.S.A. model) Remote control DVD player/ recorder 1 2 AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons 3 4 TITLE Title 5 6 Digital TV/ LD player Cable TV CD player MD/CD recorder Tuner iPod® Preset stations (1-8) Band PRESET/CH Up u VCR channel up Up Preset up (1-8) Up PRESET/CH Down d VCR channel down Down Preset down (1-8) Down A-E/CAT. j Left Left Preset down (A-E) A-E/CAT. i Right Right Preset up (A-E) ENTER Enter Enter RETURN Return Return REC/ DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec *3 Rec (recorder) *3 Rec *2*3 p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play Play w Search backward Search backward Search backward *2 Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward *4 f Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward *2 AUDIO Audio Audio Audio *2 Sound e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause b Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward *2 a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop Stop ENT. Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index MENU Menu DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Display Subsequent menu Disc skip Pause Rec *3 Pause Menu Search forward *4 Pause Skip backward Previous menu Display Notes *1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. These buttons control your VCR or DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 92). *3 When you use this button to record a source, press it twice repeatedly to prevent a malfunction. *4 Press and hold to search backward or forward. *2 91 ADVANCED OPERATION 7 8 9 VCR REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the remote control code 1 You can control your TV and other components by setting the appropriate remote control code for each input source. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. Press one of the input selector buttons or / to select the component you want to set up. MD CD CD-R SLEEP XM MULTI CH IN CBL The following table shows the default component in the “Library (component category)” column and the remote control code for each input source. DVD DTV V-AUX DVR TUNER Remote Control Code Default Settings 2 Input source Library (component category) Manufacturer Default code CD CD YAMAHA 61907 MD/CD-R MD YAMAHA 70888 XM TUNER YAMAHA 81918 DVD DVD YAMAHA 40539 DTV/CBL – – – TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 81916 V-AUX – – – DVR DVR YAMAHA 51544 – – – Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET – – Flashes 3 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter the five-digit remote control code for the component to be used. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the remote control code for the selected component is set. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 – Note You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above. In this case, try setting other YAMAHA remote control codes. MOVIE TRANSMIT 10 Flashes ENT. EFFECT y Refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. Notes • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup procedure. • If you enter the code number “9980”, the remote control code previously set for the selected component is cleared. 92 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Setting remote control TUNER ID library codes Setting library codes You can operate multiple YAMAHA receivers or amplifiers in the same room with the supplied remote control simultaneously. Set the appropriate library code to select and operate the desired component with the supplied remote control. Select one of the following codes to set the remote control TUNER ID library code for the component you want to use. 1 ■ Setting remote control AMP ID library codes Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. TUNER Select one of the following codes to set the remote control AMP ID library code for the component you want to use. 1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. 2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET TRANSMIT CODE SET Flashes Flashes 2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “00001” or “00002”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the AMP ID library code is changed. 3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “81916” or “81917”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the TUNER ID library code is changed. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 9 0 10 ENT. TRANSMIT Flashes 00001 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. 00002 *1 *2 To operate this unit using an alternative code. Flashes Remote control AMP ID *2 TUNER ID library code *1 ID1 (initial setting) 81916 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. 81917 ID2 The remote control setting The setting of this unit (see page 89) *1 *2 Function To operate this unit using an alternative code. Remote control TUNER ID *2 ID1 (initial setting) ID2 The remote control setting The setting of this unit (see page 89) Notes Notes • You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 89). • When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. • You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 89). • When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. 93 ADVANCED OPERATION Function ENT. EFFECT EFFECT AMP ID library code *1 10 TRANSMIT REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Setting remote control XM ID library codes (U.S.A. model only) Select one of the following codes to set the remote control XM ID library code for the component you want to use. 1 Press XM to select “XM” as the input source. Resetting all remote control codes Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory settings. 1 XM 2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “81918” or “81919”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the XM ID library code is changed. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENT. Function 81918 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. 81919 *1 *2 To operate this unit using an alternative code. Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “9981”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and all the remote control codes previously set are cleared and reset to the initial factory settings. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 MOVIE ENT. TRANSMIT Flashes EFFECT Flashes Remote control XM ID *2 ID1 (initial setting) ID2 The remote control setting The setting of this unit (see page 89) Notes • You need to set the corresponding remote control XM ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 89). • When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. 94 Flashes TRANSMIT EFFECT XM ID library code *1 TRANSMIT CODE SET 2 Flashes 3 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. y If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step 2, the clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the clearing procedure. USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone 2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone 2). You can control this unit from the second zone using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second zone. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone must be connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connecting Zone 2 You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second zone. • An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone. • An amplifier and speakers in the second zone. y • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected as shown below. REMOTE IN REMOTE IN REMOTE OUT Infrared signal receiver REMOTE OUT REMOTE IN REMOTE OUT YAMAHA component This unit REMOTE IN REMOTE OUT YAMAHA component ■ Multi-zone configuration and Zone 2 connections Main zone Second zone ZONE 2 OUTPUT ADVANCED OPERATION SP OUT Amplifier MONITOR OUT DVD player Remote control AUDIO IN VIDEO IN This unit MAIN ZONE ZONE 2 Infrared signal receiver Infrared signal emitter REMOTE OUT REMOTE IN Notes • When you do not use the main zone, press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel to turn off the main zone. Adjust the volume control on the amplifier in the second zone. • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 95 USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION Controlling Zone 2 You can select and control Zone 2 by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The available operations are listed as follows: • Selecting the input source of Zone 2 • Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as the input source of Zone 2 (see page 45) • Tuning into XM Satellite Radio when “XM” is selected as the input source of Zone 2 (see page 52) (U.S.A. model only) • Enjoying music stored on your iPod stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source (see page 98) 2 Press ZONE CONTROL to control Zone 2. The ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. ZONE CONTROL ZONE2 Flashes 3 Rotate the INPUT selector to select the desired input source while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing in the front panel display. INPUT y The volume level and tonal quality of Zone 2 cannot be adjusted. Adjust the volume control on the amplifier in Zone 2. Note • Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the TUNER features in Zone 2. For details about the TUNER operations, see “FM/AM TUNING” on page 45. • Select “XM” as the input source to use the XM Satellite Radio features in Zone 2. For details about the XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING” on page 52. • Select “V-AUX” as the input source to use iPod features in Zone 2. For details about the iPod operations, see “USING iPod®” on page 98. You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing in the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone 2 mode is automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone 2 selection procedure. ■ Controlling Zone 2 with the front panel 1 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF to turn on Zone 2. ZONE 2 ON/OFF 4 y ZONE 2 ON/OFF is operational only when MASTER ON/ OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. Once MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position, you can also press POWER or STANDBY on the remote control to turn on the main zone and Zone 2 or set them to the standby mode. 96 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF to set Zone 2 to the standby mode. ZONE 2 ON/OFF USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION ■ Setting the remote control to the Zone 2 mode 1 Note The remote control is originally set to the main mode to control the main zone. To control Zone 2 with the remote control, you must first set the remote control to the Zone 2 mode. 1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. Press and hold POWER or STANDBY and then press to set the remote control to the Zone 2 mode. • Press POWER when the main zone is turned on. • Press STANDBY when the main zone is turned off. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control lights up while the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode. POWER While holding down TRANSMIT or TRANSMIT CODE SET Lights up STANDBY Flashes 2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “9992”. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENT. 2 Press POWER to turn on Zone 2. POWER TRANSMIT Flashes 3 EFFECT Press one of the input selector buttons to select the desired input source of Zone 2. ■ Controlling Zone 2 with the remote control MD CD SLEEP CD-R XM MULTI CH IN CBL Notes DTV V-AUX DVR TUNER y To mute the audio output of Zone 2, press MUTE on the remote control. Press MUTE again to resume the audio output of Zone 2. MUTE 4 Press STANDBY to set Zone 2 to the standby mode. STANDBY 97 ADVANCED OPERATION • The remote control is originally set to the main mode to control the main zone, and the TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control is turned off when the remote control is set to the main mode. • When the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode, POWER, STANDBY, MUTE, and the input selector buttons are set to control Zone 2. However, the rest of the remote control buttons remain in the main mode. • The remote control automatically exits from the Zone 2 mode in the following cases: – when you do not make any operations within 10 seconds after the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode. – when you press a remote control button other than POWER, STANDBY, MUTE, and the input selector buttons. DVD USING IPOD® USING iPod® Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 22), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 36). Notes • • • • • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. Compatibility with your iPod may vary depending on the software version of your iPod. The controls on your iPod are not operational when you operate your iPod using the OSD of this unit. There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel or in the OSD of this unit. The name of the song being played appears in the front panel display up to 14 alphanumeric characters. y • For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other components” on page 91. • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 105. Setting the remote control code You need to first assign the remote control code to V-AUX on the remote control to control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. 1 Press V-AUX on the remote control to select “V-AUX” as the input source. Press CODE SET on the remote control using a ball point pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. Flashes 3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “81981”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the remote control code for V-AUX is set. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENT. EFFECT 98 ■ Controlling iPod without using the OSD Note Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. y For a complete list of the remote control buttons used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other components” on page 91. TRANSMIT CODE SET Once the remote control code is assigned to V-AUX on the remote control, you can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with or without the aid of the OSD of this unit. Once “V-AUX” is selected as the input source, you can perform the basic operations of your iPod (see page 91) using the supplied remote control without the aid of the OSD of this unit. V-AUX 2 Controlling iPod TRANSMIT Flashes USING iPod® ■ Controlling iPod using the OSD Once “V-AUX” is selected as the input source, you can perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD of this unit. You can also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to suit your personal preferences. Notes • Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod. • The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your iPod. • The “Setup” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the OSD. • Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between the “Setup” parameter settings. • You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the OSD. Instead, you must use the controls on your iPod to select the desired photos or video clips. For details, see “Controlling iPod without using the OSD” on page 98. y • Press MENU on the remote control to move back to the previous menu level. • For a complete list of the remote control buttons used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other components” on page 91. 1 Press DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display appears in the OSD. iPod DISPLAY > > > > > > > Press u / d on the remote control to select the desired menu and then press ENTER to enter the selected menu. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers), Setup (setup) Playlists > Songs Artists > Albums > Songs Albums > Songs Songs Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs Composers > Albums > Songs Setup > Shuffle, Repeat, Onscreen, FL Scroll Shuffle Shuffle Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a random order. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in a random order. • Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in a random order. Note When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the highlighted letter “S” appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled. Repeat Repeat Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. Note When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. On-screen display time Onscreen Use this feature to set the amount of time for which the OSD is displayed after you perform a certain operation on your iPod. Choices: Always, 5s, 10s • Select “Always” to display the OSD unceasingly while you are operating your iPod. • Select “5s” to turn off the OSD 5 seconds after you perform a certain operation on your iPod. • Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation on your iPod. Front panel display scroll FL Scroll Use this feature to set whether to display the iPod operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once. Choices: Cont, Once • Select “Cont” to display the iPod operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner. • Select “Once” to display the iPod operation status in the front panel display by 14 alphanumeric characters at once. 99 ADVANCED OPERATION 2 Top Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Setup • • • • • • • RESETTING THE SYSTEM RESETTING THE SYSTEM Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Notes • This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. y To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position. (U.S.A. model) 3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select “PRESET”. VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L NEXT SEARCH MODE ON LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO R PORTABLE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 1-2,5 1 2,4 3 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. PRESET-CANCEL 4 MASTER ON 2 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel repeatedly to select “RESET”. STRAIGHT OFF EFFECT Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. PRESET-RESET While holding down STRAIGHT y MASTER Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. EFFECT ON OFF 5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to confirm your selection and turn off this unit. MASTER ON 100 OFF TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. No sound Remedy See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 26 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 13 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 18-23 “INPUT MODE” is set to “DTS” or “ANALOG”. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO”. No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control) and MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control). Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 13 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the set of front speakers with SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel or SPEAKERS on the remote control. 31 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. 33 “INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG” while playing a source encoded in DTS. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 34 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”. 85 34 31, 37 101 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No picture Cause TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Cause See page Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 26, 89 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output. 33 Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 13 Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER LEVEL”. Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings. 80 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound is heard from the center speaker. “CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 79 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for “6ch Stereo”) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 63 No sound is heard from the surround speakers. “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 79 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. 38 No sound is heard from the surround back speaker. “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE” and “SUR. B SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 79 “SUR. B SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 79 “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 79 “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2channel source is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”. 79 No sound is heard from the subwoofer. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Remedy The source does not contain lowfrequency signals. 102 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy See page Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — “INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 34 A humming sound is heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 21 The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU” is set to “ON”. Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 86 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 13 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 19, 21 Some components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 103 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem Cause FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM ■ Remedy The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. See page Check the antenna connections. 24 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 46 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 46 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Set preset stations The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 46 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — 47, 48 XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only) If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Status message Cause Remedy See page CHECK ANTENNA The XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory is not connected to the XM jack of this unit or does not work properly. Check the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory connections and orient it for the best reception level. 52 UPDATING The XM user encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is updated. — NO SIGNAL The signal is too weak. Check the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory connections and orient it for the best reception level. 52 LOADING It takes longer than four seconds for audio or text data to be decoded. Wait until the decoding process has finished. — OFF AIR The XM Satellite Radio channel you selected is not currently broadcasting any signals. Check the channel number again or select another XM Satellite Radio channel. — <XM> - - - The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer available. - - - No artist name or song title is available. Select another channel category by pressing CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly. 57 / - - - <CAT> - - - 104 No channels are available for the selected category. TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 8 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 92 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 92 The library code of the remote control and the remote control ID of this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit with the corresponding remote control library code. 89, 93 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. ■ iPod Note In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod (see page 22). Status message Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect the YAMAHA iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 22 Try resetting your iPod. — Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. — The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete. Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 22 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod. Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. — Store some other playable music files on your iPod. — 105 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Unknown type GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio information ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. 106 ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/ 24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. ■ ITU-R ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering purposes. GLOSSARY ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. ■ Neural Surround Neural Surround™ represents the latest advancement in surround technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural Surround™ employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multi-channel surround playback. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. Video information ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits ADDITIONAL INFORMATION When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. 107 GLOSSARY Sound field program information ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. 108 SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................... 95 W • Video Signal Type .......................................................... PAL/NTSC • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [Asia, China, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ..........................................................135 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 130/165/195/240 W • Maximum Output Power [Europe model] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω .........................................................145 W • IEC Output Power [Europe and Asia models] 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................105 W • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 120 or more • Frequency Response CD terminal to Front L/R ...................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Usable Sensitivity (IHF)........................................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ............................................................................... 0.06% or less • Frequency Response .......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off .................. 100 dB or more • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R .......... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ..................................................... ±10 dB/60 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz • Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Output Level/Output Impedance REC OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER ............................................................. 4 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE 2 OUTPUT ............................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ AM SECTION • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz [General model] .............. AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz [Asia model] ................................... AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 350 W/440 VA [Other models] ................................................................... 360 W • Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less • AC Outlets [Australia model] ............................... 1 (Total 100 W maximum) [U.S.A., Canada and China models] ... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [Europe, Asia and General models] ..... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) • Weight ..................................................................... 11 kg (24.3 lbs) 109 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 171 x 393 mm (17.1 x 6.7 x 15.5 in) LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES CABLE TV RECEIVER ABC 10003, 10008, 10014, 10017, 10033 AMERICAST 10899 BELL & HOWELL 10014 BELL SOUTH 10899 CLEARMASTER 10883 CLEARMAX 10883 COOLMAX 10883 DIGEO 11187 DIGI 10637 DIRECTOR 10476 DUMONT 10637 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 10003, 10276, 10476, 10810 GOLDSTAR 10144 HAMLIN 10009, 10273 I3 MICRO 11602 JERROLD 10003, 10012, 10014, 10276, 10476, 10810 MACOM 10033 MEMOREX 10000 MOTOROLA 10014, 10276, 10476, 10810, 11187, 11254, 11376 MULTITECH 10883 MYRIO 11602 PACE 10008, 10237, 11877 PANASONIC 10000, 10107 PANTHER 10637 PARAGON 10000 PHILIPS 10317, 11305 PIONEER 10144, 10533, 10877, 11877 PULSAR 10000 QUASAR 10000 RADIOSHACK 10883 RCA 11256 REGAL 10273, 10279 RUNCO 10000 SAMSUNG 10144 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 10008, 10017, 10477, 10877, 11877 SEJIN 11602 SONY 11006 STARCOM 10003 SUPERCABLE 10276 SUPERMAX 10883 THOMSON 11256 TOCOM 10012 TORX 10003 TOSHIBA 10000 TRISTAR 10883 V2 10883 VIEWMASTER10883 VISION 10883 VORTEX VIEW10883 ZENITH 10000, 10525, 10899 APPENDIX-i CABLE/PVR COMBINATION AMERICAST 10899 DIGEO 11187 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 10476, 10810 JERROLD 10476, 10810 MOTOROLA 10476, 10810, 11187, 11376 PACE 10237, 11877 PIONEER 10877, 11877 RCA 11256 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 10877, 11877 SONY 11006 SUPERCABLE 10276 THOMSON 11256 ZENITH 10899 DBS/PVR COMBINATION DIRECTV 10099, 10392, 10639, 11076, 11142, 11377, 11392, 11442, 11443, 11444, 11640 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 10775, 11505 DISHPRO 10775, 11505 ECHOSTAR 10775, 11170, 11505 EXPRESSVU 10775 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 11142, 11442, 11443, 11444 JVC 11170 MOTOROLA 10869 PHILIPS 11142, 11442 PROSCAN 10392 RCA 11392 SAMSUNG 11442 SONY 10639, 11640 STAR CHOICE 10869 SATELLITE RECEIVER ALPHASTAR 10772 CHAPARRAL 10053, 10216 CROSSDIGITAL 11109 DIRECTV 10099, 10247, 10392, 10566, 10639, 10724, 10749, 10819, 11076, 11108, 11109, 11142, 11377, 11392, 11414, 11442, 11443, 11444, 11609, 11639, 11640, 11749, 11856 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 10775, 11005, 11170, 11505, 11775 DISHPRO 10775, 11005, 11505, 11775 ECHOSTAR 10269, 10280, 10775, 11005, 11170, 11505, 11775 EXPRESSVU 10775, 11775 GE 10392, 10566 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 10869 GOI 10775, 11775 GOODMANS 11246 HISENSE 11535 HITACHI 10819, 11250 HOMECABLE 10238 HTS 10775, 11775 HUGHES 10749, 11442, 11749 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 10749, 11142, 11442, 11443, 11444, 11749 ILO 11535 IQ 10210 IQ PRISM 10210 JERROLD 10869 JVC 10775, 11170, 11775 LEGEND 10269 LG 11226, 11414 MAGNAVOX 10722, 10724 MEMOREX 10269, 10724 MITSUBISHI 10749 MOTOROLA 10856, 10869 NEC 11270 NEXT LEVEL 10869 PANASONIC 10247, 10701 PAYSAT 10724 PHILIPS 10099, 10722, 10724, 10749, 10819, 11076, 11142, 11442, 11749 PIONEER 11442 PROSCAN 10392, 10566 PROTON 11535 RADIOSHACK 10869 RCA 10143, 10392, 10566, 10855, 11392 REALISTIC 10052 SAMSUNG 11108, 11109, 11142, 11276, 11377, 11442, 11609 SANYO 11219 SONY 10639, 11639, 11640 STAR CHOICE 10869 STS 10210 TIVO 11142, 11442, 11443, 11444 TOSHIBA 10082, 10749, 10790, 10819, 11285, 11749 ULTIMATETV 11392, 11640 UNIDEN US DIGITAL USDTV VOOM ZENITH 10052, 10074, 10238, 10722, 10724 11535 11535 10869 11856 HDTV DECORDER ACCURIAN 11653 EPSON 11563, 11650 LG 11415 MACRO IMAGE TECHNOLOGY 11383 MOTOROLA 11363 MYHD 11383 PANASONIC 11120 PIONEER 11010 PRINCETON 10113, 10295 SAMSUNG 11190, 11490 SASEM 11641 SENSORY SCIENCE 11126 SHARP 11010 SYLVANIA 11563 TELEMANN 11604 VIEWSONIC 11329 VIZIO 11126 OTHER VIDEO ACCESSORIES ABS 11272 ACCURIAN 11653 ALIENWARE 11272 CYBERPOWER 11272 D-LINK 11554 ECS 11553 EPSON 11563, 11650 GATEWAY 11272 HEWLETT PACKARD 11267, 11272 HOWARD COMPUTERS 11272 HP 11272 HUSH 11272 IBUYPOWER 11272 INTERVIDEO 11393 KEYSPAN 11344 KWORLD 11403 LEADTEK 11614 LG 11415 LINKSYS 11272, 11365 MACRO IMAGE TECHNOLOGY 11383 MEDIA CENTER PC 11272 MICROSOFT 11272 MIND 11272 MOTOROLA 11363 MYHD 11383 NIVEUS MEDIA 11272 NORTHGATE 11272 PANASONIC 11120 PINNACLE SYSTEMS 11268 PIONEER 11010 PRINCETON 10113, 10295 RICAVISION 11272 ROKU 11486 SAMSUNG 11190, 11490 SASEM 11641 SENSORY SCIENCE 11126 SHARP 11010 SMC 11456 SONY 11272, 11324, 11364 STACK 9 11272 STREAMZAP 11309 SYLVANIA 11563 SYSTEMAX 11272 TAGAR SYSTEMS 11272 TELEMANN 11604 TOSHIBA 11272 TOUCH 11272 VIEWSONIC 11272, 11329 VIZIO 11126 VOODOO 11272 ZT GROUP 11272 TV ADMIRAL ADVENT 20093, 20463 20761, 20783, 20815, 20817, 20842, 21933 AIKO 20092 AIWA 20701 AKAI 20030, 20060, 20672, 20702, 20812, 21903 ALBATRON 20700, 20843 AMERICA ACTION 20180 AMPRO 20751 ANAM 20180 AOC 20030 APEX DIGITAL 20156, 20748, 20765, 20767, 20879, 21943 AUDIOVOX 20092, 20180, 20451, 20623, 20802, 20875, 21937, 21951, 21952 AVENTURA 20171 AXION 21937 BELL & HOWELL 20154 BENQ 21032 BOXLIGHT 20893 BRADFORD 20180 BROKSONIC 20180, 20236, 20463, 21929, 21935, 21938 CANDLE 20030 CARNIVALE 20030 CARVER 20054 CELEBRITY 20000 CELERA 20765 CHANGHONG 20765 CITIZEN 20030, 20060, 20092, 21928 CLARION 20180 COMMERCIAL SOLUTIONS 20047, 21447 CONTEC 20180 CRAIG 20180 CROSLEY 20054 CROWN 20180 CURTIS MATHES 20030, 20047, 20054, 20060, 20093, 20145, 20154, 20166, 20451, 20466, 20702, 21147, 21347, 21919 CXC 20180 DAEWOO 20092, 20451, 20623, 20661, 20672, 21661, 21928 DELL 21080, 21178, 21454 DENON 20145, 20511 DUMONT 20017 DURABRAND 20171, 20178, 20180, 20463, 21034 DWIN 20093, 20720, 20774 ELECTROBAND 20000 ELECTROGRAPH 21755 EMERSON 20038, 20154, 20171, 20178, 20180, 20236, 20451, 20463, 20623, 21928, 21929, 21944 ENVISION 20030, 20813 EPSON 20833, 20840 ESA 20171, 20812 FISHER 20154 FUJITSU 20683, 20809, 20853 FUNAI 20171, 20180, 21904 FUTURETECH 20180 GATEWAY 21755, 21756 GE 20047, 20051, 20178, 20451, 21147, 21347, 21447, 21917, 21919, 21922 GIBRALTER 20017, 20030 GO VIDEO 20886 GOLDSTAR 20030, 20178, 21926 GOODMANS 20360 GRUNDIG 20683 GRUNPY 20180 HAIER 21034 HALLMARK 20178 HARLEY DAVIDSON 21904 HARMAN/KARDON 20054 HARVARD 20180 HAVERMY 20093 HELIOS 20865 HELLO KITTY 20451 HISENSE 20748 HITACHI 20038, 20145, 20151, 20413, 21145, 21904, 21960 HYUNDAI 20849 INFINITY 20054 INTEQ 20017 JBL 20054 JCB JENSEN JVC KEC KENWOOD KLH KTV LG LLOYD'S LOEWE LXI 20000 20761, 20815, 20817, 21933 20053, 20069, 20160, 20169, 20731, 21253 20180 20030, 20859 20765, 20767, 21962 20030, 20180 20178, 20442, 20700, 20856, 21178, 21265 21904 20136 20047, 20054, 20154, 20156, 20178 PENNEY PHILCO PHILIPS PILOT PIONEER POLAROID PORTLAND PRIMA PRINCETON PRISM PROSCAN MAGNASONIC 21928 20030, 20054, 20706, 20802, 21254, 21454, 21904, 21931, 21944 MARANTZ 20030, 20054, 20704, 20854, 20855, 21154, 21454 MATSUSHITA 20250, 20650 MAXENT 21755 MEGAPOWER 20700 MEGATRON 20145, 20178 MEMOREX 20150, 20154, 20178, 20463, 21926 MGA 20030, 20150, 20155, 20178 MIDLAND 20017, 20047, 20051 MITSUBISHI 20014, 20093, 20150, 20155, 20178, 20331, 20358, 20836, 20868, 21250, 21917 MONIVISION 20700, 20843 MOTOROLA 20093 MTC 20030, 20060 MULTITECH 20180 NAD 20156, 20178, 20866 NEC 20030, 20497, 20882, 21704 NETTV 21755 NIKKO 20030, 20092, 20178 NORCENT 20748, 20824 NTC 20092 ONWA 20180 OPTIMUS 20154, 20166, 20250, 20650 OPTOMA 20887 OPTONICA 20093 ORION 20236, 20463, 21463, 21929 PANASONIC 20051, 20226, 20250, 20650, 20863, 21410, 21919, 21941, 21946, 21947 MAGNAVOX PROTON PULSAR QUASAR 20030, 20047, 20051, 20060, 20156, 20178, 21347, 21919, 21926 20030, 20054 20054, 20690, 21154, 21454 20030 20038, 20166, 20679, 20866 20765, 20865 20092 20761, 20783, 20815, 20817, 21933 20700, 20717 20051 20047, 20466, 21347, 21447, 21922 20178, 20466 20017 20051, 20250, 20650, 21919 RADIOSHACK 20030, 20047, 20154, 20178, 20180, 21904 RCA 20038, 20047, 20090, 20679, 21047, 21147, 21247, 21347, 21447, 21547, 21917, 21919, 21922, 21948, 21953, 21958 REALISTIC 20030, 20154, 20178, 20180 RUNCO 20017, 20030, 20497, 20603 SAMPO 20030, 21755 SAMSUNG 20030, 20060, 20178, 20587, 20702, 20766, 20812, 20814, 21060, 21903, 21959 SANSUI 20463, 21904, 21929, 21935 SANYO 20088, 20154, 20484, 20799, 20893 SCOTCH 20178 SCOTT 20178, 20180, 20236 SEARS 20047, 20054, 20154, 20156, 20171, 20178, 21904, 21926 SHARP 20093, 20153, 20491, 20688, 20689, 20818, 20851, 21917 SHENG CHIA 20093 SOLE 20813 SONY 20000, 20011, 20080, 20111, 20810, 20834, 20867, 21100, 21904, 21925 SOUNDESIGN 20178, 20180 SOVA 21952 APPENDIX-ii SQUAREVIEW 20171 SSS 20180 STARLITE 20180 STUDIO EXPERIENCE 20843 SUPERSCAN 20093, 20864 SUPREME 20000 SVA 20587, 20748, 20865, 20870, 20871, 20872 SYLVANIA 20030, 20054, 20171, 21931, 21944 SYMPHONIC 20171, 20180, 21904 TANDY 20093 TATUNG 21756 TECHNICS 20051, 20250 TECHVIEW 20847 TECHWOOD 20051 TEKNIKA 20054, 20060, 20092, 20150, 20180 TELEFUNKEN 20702 THOMAS 21904 TMK 20178 TNCI 20017 TOSHIBA 20060, 20154, 20156, 20650, 20832, 20845, 21156, 21256, 21265, 21356, 21656, 21704, 21918, 21935, 21936, 21945 TVS 20463 VECTOR RESEARCH 20030 VICTOR 20053 VIDIKRON 20054 VIDTECH 20178 VIEWSONIC 20857, 20864, 20885, 21755 VIZIO 20864, 20885, 21756 WARDS 20030, 20054, 20080, 20111, 20178, 20866, 21156 WAYCON 20156 WESTINGHOUSE 20451, 20889 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 20463, 20623 YAMAHA 20030, 20650, 20769, 20833, 20839, 21405, 21406, 21407 ZENITH 20017, 20092, 20178, 20463, 21145, 21904, 21929 PVR ABS 31972 ALIENWARE 31972 CYBERPOWER31972 DELL 31972 DIRECTV 30739 GATEWAY 31972 HEWLETT PACKARD 31972 APPENDIX-iii HOWARD COMPUTERS 31972 HP 31972 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 30739 HUMAX 30739 HUSH 31972 IBUYPOWER 31972 LG 32010 LINKSYS 31972 MEDIA CENTER PC 31972 MICROSOFT 31972 MIND 31972 NIVEUS MEDIA 31972 NORTHGATE 31972 PANASONIC 30616, 31807, 31808, 31809 PHILIPS 30618, 30739 RCA 30880 REPLAYTV 30614, 30616 SONIC BLUE 30614, 30616 SONY 30636, 31972 STACK 9 31972 SYSTEMAX 31972 TAGAR SYSTEMS 31972 TIVO 30618, 30636, 30739 TOSHIBA 31008, 31972 TOUCH 31972 VIEWSONIC 31972 VOODOO 31972 ZT GROUP 31972 VCR ABS ADMIRAL 31972 30048, 30209, 30479 AIKO 30278 AIWA 30037 AKAI 30041 ALIENWARE 31972 AMERICA ACTION 30278 AMERICAN HIGH 30035 ASHA 30240 AUDIOVOX 30037, 30278 BEAUMARK 30240 BELL & HOWELL 30104 BROKSONIC 30002, 30121, 30184, 30209, 30479 CALIX 30037 CANON 30035 CARVER 30081 CCE 30072, 30278 CITIZEN 30037, 30278 COLT 30072 CRAIG 30037, 30047, 30072, 30240 CURTIS MATHES 30035, 30041, 30060, 30162 CYBERNEX 30240 CYBERPOWER 31972 DAEWOO 30045, 30278 DELL 31972 DENON 30042 DIRECTV 30739 DURABRAND 30038, 30039 ELECTROHOME 30037, 30043 ELECTROPHONIC 30037 EMEREX 30032 EMERSON 30002, 30037, 30043, 30121, 30184, 30209, 30278, 30479, 30593, 31593 FISHER 30047, 30104 FUJI 30033, 30035 FUNAI 30593, 31593 GATEWAY 31972 GE 30035, 30060, 30240 GO VIDEO 30240, 30432 GOLDSTAR 30037, 30038 HARMAN/KARDON 30038, 30081 HARWOOD 30072 HEWLETT PACKARD 31972 HI-Q 30047 HITACHI 30041, 30042 HOWARD COMPUTERS 31972 HP 31972 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 30042, 30739 HUMAX 30739, 31988 HUSH 31972 IBUYPOWER 31972 JENSEN 30041 JVC 30041, 30067, 31162 KEC 30037, 30278 KENWOOD 30038, 30041, 30067 KLH 30072 KODAK 30035, 30037 LG 31037, 32010 LINKSYS 31972 LOGIK 30072 LXI 30037 MAGNASONIC 30593 MAGNAVOX 30035, 30039, 30081, 30149, 30563, 30593 MAGNIN 30240 MARANTZ 30035, 30081 MARTA 30037 MATSUSHITA 30035, 30162, 31162 MEDIA CENTER PC 31972 MEI 30035 MEMOREX 30035, 30037, 30039, 30047, 30048, 30104, 30162, 30209, 30240, 30479, 31037, 31162, 31262 MGA 30043, 30240 MGN TECHNOLOGY 30240 MICROSOFT 31972 MIND 31972 MINOLTA 30042 MITSUBISHI 30043, 30067 MOTOROLA 30035, 30048 MTC MULTITECH NEC 30240 30072 30038, 30041, 30067, 30104 NIKKO 30037 NIVEUS MEDIA 31972 NOBLEX 30240 NORTHGATE 31972 OLYMPUS 30035 OPTIMUS 30037, 30048, 30104, 30162, 30432, 30593, 31048, 31062, 31162, 31262 ORION 30002, 30184, 30209, 30479 PANASONIC 30035, 30162, 30616, 31062, 31162, 31244, 31262, 31562, 31807, 31808, 31809 PENNEY 30035, 30037, 30038, 30042, 30240 PENTAX 30042 PHILCO 30035 PHILIPS 30035, 30081, 30618, 30739, 31081, 31181 PILOT 30037 PIONEER 30067 POLK AUDIO 30081 PROFITRONIC 30240 PROSCAN 30060 PROTEC 30072 PULSAR 30039 QUASAR 30035, 30162, 31162 RADIOSHACK 31037 RADIX 30037 RANDEX 30037 RCA 30042, 30060, 30149, 30240, 30880 REALISTIC 30035, 30037, 30047, 30048, 30104 REPLAYTV 30614, 30616 RICAVISION 31972 RUNCO 30039 SAMSUNG 30045, 30240, 30739 SANKY 30039, 30048 SANSUI 30041, 30067, 30209, 30479 SANYO 30047, 30104, 30240 SCOTT 30043, 30045, 30121, 30184 SEARS 30035, 30037, 30042, 30047, 30104 SHARP 30048, 30848 SHINTOM 30072 SHOGUN 30240 SINGER 30072 SONIC BLUE 30614, 30616 SONY 30032, 30033, 30035, 30636, 31032, 31972 STACK 9 31972 STS SYLVANIA 30042 30035, 30043, 30081, 30593, 31593 SYMPHONIC 30593, 31593 SYSTEMAX 31972 TAGAR SYSTEMS 31972 TATUNG 30041 TEAC 30041 TECHNICS 30035, 30162 TEKNIKA 30035, 30037 TIVO 30618, 30636, 30739, 31503 TMK 30240 TOSHIBA 30043, 30045, 30209, 31008, 31972, 31988 TOTEVISION 30037, 30240 TOUCH 31972 UNITECH 30240 VECTOR 30045 VECTOR RESEARCH 30038 VIDEO CONCEPTS 30045 VIDEOMAGIC 30037 VIDEOSONIC 30240 VIEWSONIC 31972 VOODOO 31972 WARDS 30035, 30042, 30047, 30048, 30060, 30072, 30081, 30149, 30240 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 30072, 30209 XR-1000 30035, 30072 YAMAHA 30038 ZENITH 30033, 30039, 30209, 30479, 31139 ZT GROUP 31972 DVD PLAYER ADCOM 41094 ADVENT 41016 AIWA 40641 AKAI 40899, 41089 ALCO 40790 ALLEGRO 40869 AMPHION MEDIA WORKS 40872 AMW 40872 APEX DIGITAL 40672, 40717, 40755, 40794, 40796, 40797, 40830, 41004, 41020, 41061, 41100 ASPIRE DIGITAL 41407 AUDIOVOX 40790, 41041, 41071, 41072, 41121, 41122 AXION 41071, 41072 B&K 40655, 40662 BEL CANTO DESIGN 41571 BLAUPUNKT 40717 BLUE PARADE40571 BROKSONIC 40695, 40868 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 40490 CINEVISION 40833, 40869, 40876 CITIZEN 41277 COBY 40778, 40852, 41107, 41177, 41351 CURTIS MATHES 41087 CYBERHOME 40816, 40874, 41023, 41024, 41117 DAEWOO 40705, 40833, 40869, 41169, 41172, 41234, 41242 DAYTEK 40872 DENON 40490 DESAY 41407 DISNEY 40675, 41270 DUAL 41068, 41085 DURABRAND 41127 DVD2000 40521 EMERSON 40591, 40675, 40821, 41268 ENTERPRISE 40591 FUNAI 40675, 41268 GATEWAY 41073, 41077 GE 40522, 40717, 40815 GO VIDEO 40715, 40741, 40744, 40783, 40833, 40869, 41044, 41075, 41099 GO VISION 41071, 41072 GOLDSTAR 40741 GPX 40699, 40769 GRADIENTE 40490 GREENHILL 40717 GRUNDIG 40539 HARMAN/KARDON 40582, 40702 HITACHI 40573, 40664, 41247 HITEKER 40672 INITIAL 40717 INTEGRA 40571, 40627 JATON 41078 JBL 40702 JENSEN 41016 JSI 41423 JVC 40558, 40623, 40867 JWIN 41049, 41051 KAWASAKI 40790 KENWOOD 40490, 40534, 40682, 40737 KLH 40717, 40790, 41020, 41149, 41261 KONKA 40711 KOSS 40651, 41423 LANDEL 40826 LASONIC 40798, 41173 LECSON 41533 LENOXX 41127 LG 40591, 40741, 40801, 40869 LOEWE 40511 MAGNAVOX 40503, 40539, 40675, 40821 MALATA MARANTZ MCINTOSH MEMOREX MICROSOFT MINTEK MITSUBISHI MOMITSU MYRYAD NAD 40782, 41159 40539 41273, 41533 40695, 41270 40522 40717, 40839 40521, 41521 41082 40894 40591, 40692, 40741 NAKAMICHI 41222 NEC 40785 NESA 40717 NEXT BASE 40826 NORCENT 40872, 41003, 41107, 41265 ONKYO 40503, 40627, 40792, 41627 ORITRON 40651 PANASONIC 40490, 40503, 40632, 40703, 41762 PHILIPS 40503, 40539, 40675, 40854, 41260, 41267, 41354 PIANODISC 41024 PIONEER 40525, 40571, 40632, 41571 POLAROID 41020, 41061 POLK AUDIO 40539 PRIMA 41016 PRINCETON 40674 PROCEED 40672 PROSCAN 40522 PROVISION 40778 QWESTAR 40651 RCA 40522, 40571, 40717, 40790, 40822, 41022, 41132, 41193 RIO 40869 RJTECH 41360 ROTEL 40623, 41178 ROWA 40823 SAMPO 40698, 40752 SAMSUNG 40490, 40573, 40744, 40820, 40899, 41044, 41075 SANSUI 40695 SANYO 40695, 40873 SHARP 40630, 40675, 40752, 41256 SHARPER IMAGE 41117 SHERWOOD 40633, 41043, 41077 SHINSONIC 40533, 40839 SIGMA DESIGNS 40674 SONIC BLUE 40869, 41099 SONY 40533, 40864, 41017, 41033, 41533 SOVA 41122 SUNGALE 41074 SUPERSCAN 40821 SVA 40860, 41105 SYLVANIA 40675, 40821, 41268 SYMPHONIC 40675, 41268 TAG MCLAREN 40894 TEAC 40790, 40809 TECHNICS 40490, 40703 TECHNOSONIC 40730 TECHWOOD 40692 THETA DIGITAL 40571 TOSHIBA 40503, 40695, 41154 TREDEX 40799, 40800, 40803, 40804 URBAN CONCEPTS 40503 US LOGIC 40839 VENTURER 40790 VIZIO 41064, 41226 XBOX 40522 YAMAHA 40490, 40539, 40545, 41543 YAMAKAWA 40872 ZENITH 40503, 40591, 40741, 40869 ZOECE 41265 LD PLAYER AIWA CARVER DENON DISCO VISION 40203 40064, 40194, 40323 40059, 40172 40023 FUNAI 40203 HARMAN/KARDON 40194 HITACHI 40023 MAGNAVOX 40194, 40217 MARANTZ 40064, 40194 MITSUBISHI 40059 NAD 40059 OPTIMUS 40059 PANASONIC 40204 PHILIPS 40064, 40194 PIONEER 40023, 40059 POLK AUDIO 40194 QUASAR 40204 REALISTIC 40203 SAMSUNG 40323 SEGA 40023 SONY 40193, 40201 TECHNICS 40204 THETA DIGITAL 40194 YAMAHA 40217 DVD RECORDER APEX DIGITAL 51056 ASPIRE DIGITAL 51168 COBY 51086 CYBERHOME 51129 FUNAI 50675, 51334 GATEWAY 51073, 51158 GO VIDEO 50741, 51158, 51304, 51730 ILO 51348 JVC 51164, 51275 LG 50741 LITEON 51158, 51416, 51440 MAGNAVOX 50646 APPENDIX-iv PANASONIC 50490, 51010, 51011 PHILIPS 50646 PIONEER 50631, 51475, 51476 POLAROID 51086 RCA 50522 SAMSUNG 50490 SENSORY SCIENCE| 51158 SHARP 50675, 51550, 51556, 50630 SONY 51033, 51069, 51070, 51431 SYLVANIA 50675 TOSHIBA 51510 VICTOR 51275 YAMAHA 51544 ZENITH 50741 CD PLAYER AIWA 60157 ARCAM 60157 BURMESTER 60420 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 60029, 60303 CARVER 60157, 60179 DENON 60003, 60034 DKK 60000 DMX ELECTRONICS 60157 FISHER 60179 GARRARD 60393, 60420 GENEXXA 60032 HARMAN/KARDON 60157 HITACHI 60032 INTEGRA 60101 JVC 60072 KENWOOD 60028, 60190, 60626 KLH 61318, 61372, 61711 KRELL 60157 LINN 60157 MAGNAVOX 60038, 60157 MARANTZ 60029, 60038, 60157, 60180, 60435, 60626 MCINTOSH 60256, 60290, 60660 MCS 60029 MIRO 60000 MISSION 60157 MTC 60420 NSM 60157 ONKYO 60101, 61327 OPTIMUS 60000, 60032, 60087, 60179, 60420, 60468 PANASONIC 60029, 60303, 60388, 60752 PARASOUND 60420 APPENDIX-v PHILIPS 60157, 60274, 60626 PIONEER 60032, 60468, 61062 POLK AUDIO 60157 PROCEED 60420 PROTON 60157 QED 60157 QUAD 60157 QUASAR 60029 RCA 60032, 60053, 60179, 60420, 60468, 61062 REALISTIC 60179, 60180, 60420 ROTEL 60157, 60420 SAE 60157 SANSUI 60157 SANYO 60087, 60179 SHARP 60180 SHERWOOD 60180 SONIC FRONTIERS 60157 SONY 60000, 60490 SUGDEN 60157 TAG MCLAREN 60157 TASCAM 60420 TEAC 60180, 60378, 60393, 60420 TECHNICS 60029, 60303 VICTOR 60072 WARDS 60053, 60157 YAMAHA 60036, 60490, 61907 CD RECORDER HARMAN/KARDON 71202 JVC 71294 KENWOOD 70626 KLH 71373 LG 71208 MARANTZ 70626 PHILIPS 70626 PIONEER 71062, 71087 RCA 70053, 70420 SONY 70000, 70100, 71364 TDK 71208 TEAC 70420 YAMAHA 70888, 71292 MD RECORDER DENON KENWOOD ONKYO OPTIMUS PIONEER SHARP SHERWOOD SONY YAMAHA 70873 70681, 70826 70868 71063 71063 70861 71067 70490 70490, 70888, 71909 TAPE DECK AIWA 70029, 70197 CARVER 70029 DENON 70076 HARMAN/KARDON 70029, 70182 JVC 70244, 70273 KENWOOD 70070 MAGNAVOX 70029 MARANTZ 70029 ONKYO 70135, 70282 OPTIMUS 70027, 70220 PANASONIC 70229 PHILIPS 70029 PIONEER 70027, 70099, 70220 POLK AUDIO 70029 RCA 70027, 70220 SANSUI 70029 SONY 70170, 70243, 70291 TECHNICS 70229 VICTOR 70273 WARDS 70027 YAMAHA 70094, 70097, 70524 TUNER ADC ADCOM 80531 80616, 81616, 81617 AIWA 80121, 80158, 80189, 81405 AMC 81077 AMPLIFIER TECHNOLOGIES 81584 ANAM 81074, 81609 ARCAM 81189 ATLANTIC TECHNOLOGY 81487 AUDIOTRONIC 81189 AUDIOVOX 81627 B&K 80701, 80820, 80840 BEL CANTO DESIGN 81584 BK 80702 BOSE 81933 BOSTON ACOUSTICS 81918 BRIX 81602 CAPETRONIC 80531 CARVER 80008, 80121, 80189, 80360, 81189 CLASSE 81916 DELPHI 81414 DENON 80121, 81360 EMERSON 80424 FISHER 80219, 80360 FOSGATE 81487 GARRARD 80424 GATEWAY 81567 HARMAN/KARDON 80110, 80189, 80891, 81304 INTEGRA 80135, 81320 JBL 80110 JVC 80074, 81058, 81811 KENWOOD 80027, 80077, 81313, 81569, 81570 KLH 81428 KOSS 80424 LEXICON 81076 LINN 80189 MAGNAVOX 80189, 80531, 81189, 81269 MARANTZ 80039, 80189, 80200, 81189, 81269 MCS 80039, 80346 MICROMEGA 81189 MITSUBISHI 81393 MYRYAD 81189, 81918 NAD 80320 NAKAMICHI 80347, 81313, 81555, 81919 NIRO 81908 ONKYO 80135, 81320 OPTIMUS 80177, 80219, 80531, 80670, 81023, 81074 OUTLAW 81487 OUTLAW AUDIO81487 PANASONIC 80039, 80309, 81308, 81518 PHILIPS 80189, 81189, 81269 PIONEER 80014, 80150, 80531, 80630, 81023 POLK AUDIO 80189, 81414 QUASAR 80039 RCA 80054, 80346, 80360, 80531, 81023, 81074, 81154, 81609 REALISTIC 80163 SAMSUNG 81304 SANSUI 80189, 80346, 81189 SANYO 80219 SCOTT 80163, 80322 SHERWOOD 81077, 81423, 81567, 81918 SIRIUS 81602, 81627, 81811 SONY 80158, 81058, 81406, 81759 SOUNDESIGN 80670 STEREOPHONICS 81023 SUNFIRE 81313 TEAC TECHNICS 80163, 81074 80039, 80309, 81308, 81518 THORENS 81189 TOSHIBA 80135 VICTOR 80074 WARDS 80014, 80054, 80158, 80189 XM 81406, 81414 YAMAHA 80176, 81176, 81276, 81331, 81375, 81908, (TUNER ID1) 81916 (TUNER ID2) 81917 (XM ID1) 81918 (XM ID 2) 81919 OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES YAMAHA (iPod) 81981 APPENDIX-vi RX-V559_U_cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, November 22, 2005 2:20 PM U RX-V559 RX-V559 AV Receiver © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WG73420